WO2021102271A1 - Monoclonal cell lines expressing an exogenous substance and uses thereof - Google Patents

Monoclonal cell lines expressing an exogenous substance and uses thereof Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2021102271A1
WO2021102271A1 PCT/US2020/061524 US2020061524W WO2021102271A1 WO 2021102271 A1 WO2021102271 A1 WO 2021102271A1 US 2020061524 W US2020061524 W US 2020061524W WO 2021102271 A1 WO2021102271 A1 WO 2021102271A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
cell
genetically modified
seq
ocr
sequence
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2020/061524
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Lauren Emily BARNEY
Guillaume Carmona
Marianthi PAPAKOSTA
Jared A. SEWELL
Original Assignee
Sigilon Therapeutics, Inc.
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Sigilon Therapeutics, Inc. filed Critical Sigilon Therapeutics, Inc.
Priority to US17/778,159 priority Critical patent/US20230038379A1/en
Priority to CA3161672A priority patent/CA3161672A1/en
Priority to EP20891108.1A priority patent/EP4061942A4/en
Publication of WO2021102271A1 publication Critical patent/WO2021102271A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12NMICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N5/00Undifferentiated human, animal or plant cells, e.g. cell lines; Tissues; Cultivation or maintenance thereof; Culture media therefor
    • C12N5/06Animal cells or tissues; Human cells or tissues
    • C12N5/0602Vertebrate cells
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12NMICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N5/00Undifferentiated human, animal or plant cells, e.g. cell lines; Tissues; Cultivation or maintenance thereof; Culture media therefor
    • C12N5/0012Cell encapsulation
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K35/00Medicinal preparations containing materials or reaction products thereof with undetermined constitution
    • A61K35/12Materials from mammals; Compositions comprising non-specified tissues or cells; Compositions comprising non-embryonic stem cells; Genetically modified cells
    • A61K35/30Nerves; Brain; Eyes; Corneal cells; Cerebrospinal fluid; Neuronal stem cells; Neuronal precursor cells; Glial cells; Oligodendrocytes; Schwann cells; Astroglia; Astrocytes; Choroid plexus; Spinal cord tissue
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K35/00Medicinal preparations containing materials or reaction products thereof with undetermined constitution
    • A61K35/12Materials from mammals; Compositions comprising non-specified tissues or cells; Compositions comprising non-embryonic stem cells; Genetically modified cells
    • A61K35/36Skin; Hair; Nails; Sebaceous glands; Cerumen; Epidermis; Epithelial cells; Keratinocytes; Langerhans cells; Ectodermal cells
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12NMICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N15/00Mutation or genetic engineering; DNA or RNA concerning genetic engineering, vectors, e.g. plasmids, or their isolation, preparation or purification; Use of hosts therefor
    • C12N15/09Recombinant DNA-technology
    • C12N15/63Introduction of foreign genetic material using vectors; Vectors; Use of hosts therefor; Regulation of expression
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12NMICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N15/00Mutation or genetic engineering; DNA or RNA concerning genetic engineering, vectors, e.g. plasmids, or their isolation, preparation or purification; Use of hosts therefor
    • C12N15/09Recombinant DNA-technology
    • C12N15/87Introduction of foreign genetic material using processes not otherwise provided for, e.g. co-transformation
    • C12N15/90Stable introduction of foreign DNA into chromosome
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12NMICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N2510/00Genetically modified cells
    • C12N2510/02Cells for production

Definitions

  • Treating chronic and genetic diseases by implanting cells engineered to produce a therapeutic substance capable of treating such diseases has exciting potential to improve the health of patients with such diseases.
  • the implanted cells must be capable of producing therapeutic levels of the desired therapeutic substance for several weeks, months or even longer under conditions in which a selection marker is undesirable.
  • a general approach to achieve stable, high level expression of the therapeutic substance is to implant engineered cells from a monoclonal cell line in which the therapeutic substance is encoded by an exogenous coding sequence inserted into one or more locations in the cell genome.
  • the present disclosure is based on the identification of specific open chromatin regions in the genome of a human retinal pigment epithelial (RPE) cell line that are suitable insertion sites for an exogenous transcription unit to achieve stable, high expression of a polypeptide encoded by the exogenous transcription unit.
  • RPE retinal pigment epithelial
  • Described herein is a genetically modified cell derived from a human cell, e.g., an immortalized human cell, and comprising at least one exogenous transcription unit inserted into at least one of three open chromatin regions (OCRs) located on Chromosomes 2, 5 and 12, or into at least one of four OCRs located on Chromosomes 2, 5, 8 and 12.
  • OCRs open chromatin regions
  • the insertion site of the transcription unit is defined by reference to certain nucleotide positions in the human hgl9 reference genome (hgl9) sequences for these chromosomes: the Chr 2 OCR is located between nucleotide positions corresponding to 100817157 and 100818556; the Chr 5 OCR is located nucleotide positions corresponding to 53853682 and 53854987; the Chr 12 OCR is located between nucleotide positions corresponding to 122186354 and 122187572.
  • the insertion site of the transcription unit in Chr 8 is defined by reference to certain nucleotide positions in the human hg38 reference genome (hg38) sequence for Chr 8: the OCR is located between nucleotide positions corresponding to 30,105,499 and 30,106,497.
  • the location of one or more of the OCRs is defined in reference to a nucleotide sequence present in the corresponding hgl9 chromosome sequence: the Chr 2 OCR comprises SEQ ID NO:l or a nucleotide sequence that is at least 90%, 95%, 98%, or 99% identical to SEQ ID NO:l; the Chr 5 OCR comprises SEQ ID NO:2 or a nucleotide sequence that is at least 90%, 95%, 98%, or 99% identical to SEQ ID NO:2; the Chr 8 OCR comprises SEQ ID NO:26 or a nucleotide sequence that is at least 90%, 95%, 98%, or 99% identical to SEQ ID NO:26; and the Chr 12 OCR comprises SEQ ID NO:3 or a nucleotide sequence that is at least 90%, 95%, 98%, or 99% identical to SEQ ID NO:3.
  • the exogenous transcription unit is inserted into one, two, three or four of the following locations: between two nucleotide positions corresponding to 211 and 218 in SEQ ID NO:l; between two nucleotide positions corresponding to 59 and 60 in SEQ ID NO:2; between two nucleotide positions corresponding to 440 and 445 in SEQ ID NO:26; and between two nucleotide positions corresponding to 518 and 525 in SEQ ID NO:3.
  • the genetically modified cell is derived from a human epithelial cell.
  • the genetically modified cell is derived from an RPE cell, e.g, an immortalized human RPE cell.
  • the genetically modified cell is derived from a human cell line available from the American Type Culture Collection (Manassas, VA), e.g., the ARPE-19 (ATCC ® CRL-2302TM) cell line or the hTERT RPE-1 (ATCC ® CRL-4000TM) cell line.
  • the exogenous transcription unit comprises a promoter sequence operably linked to a coding sequence for a polypeptide and a poly A signal sequence operably linked to the coding sequence.
  • the promoter, poly A signal sequences are preferably selected to achieve high expression of the polypeptide in the parental human cell line.
  • the genetically modified cell is derived from the ARPE-19 cell line, the promoter consists essentially of, or consists of, SEQ ID NO:4 or SEQ ID NO:5, and the poly A signal sequence consists essentially of, or consists of, SEQ ID NO:6.
  • the coding sequence is preferably codon-optimized for expression of the polypeptide in the parental cell line.
  • the polypeptide is constitutively expressed by the genetically modified cell when the cell is cultured in vitro.
  • the polypeptide is a blood clotting factor, e.g., a human FVIII protein.
  • the present disclosure also provides a composition comprising a plurality of genetically modified cells described herein and a method of manufacturing the composition.
  • the composition comprises a cell culture media or a storage medium.
  • the composition comprises a polymer solution in which the cells are suspended, e.g., a polymer solution described herein, e.g., comprising alginate and a cell-binding substance.
  • the method of manufacturing the composition comprises culturing a plurality of a genetically modified cell described herein until a desired number of cultured cells has been produced, and combining the desired number of cultured cells with a cell culture media, a storage medium or a polymer solution.
  • the present disclosure provides a device comprising at least one cell- containing compartment which comprises a genetically modified cell described herein or a plurality of such cells.
  • the device comprises a polymer composition encapsulating the genetically modified cell(s).
  • the encapsulating polymer composition comprises at least one cell binding-substance (CBS), e.g., a cell binding peptide, e.g., RGD or RGDSP.
  • the device further comprises at least one means for mitigating the foreign body response (FBR) when the device is placed inside a subject.
  • FBR foreign body response
  • the means for mitigating the FBR comprises an afibrotic compound, as defined herein, disposed on an exterior surface of the device and/or within a barrier compartment surrounding the cell-containing compartment.
  • the afibrotic compound is a compound of Formula (I): or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein the variables A, L 1 , M, L 2 , P, L 3 , and Z, as well as related subvariables, are defined herein.
  • the compound of Formula (I) is a compound of Formula (I): or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein the variables A, L 1 , M, L 2 , P, L 3 , and Z, as well as related subvariables, are defined herein.
  • the compound of Formula (I) is a compound of Formula (I): or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein the variables A, L 1 , M, L 2 , P, L 3 , and Z, as well as related subvariables, are defined herein.
  • the afibrotic compound is Compound 100, Compound 101 or Compound 102 shown in Table 3.
  • a device of the disclosure is a 2-compartment hydrogel capsule (e.g., a microcapsule (less than 1 mm in diameter) or a millicapsule (at least 1 mm in diameter)) in which a cell-containing compartment (e.g., the inner compartment) comprising a plurality of live genetically modified cells described herein (and optionally one or more cell binding substances) is surrounded by a barrier compartment comprising an afibrotic polymer (e.g., the outer compartment, e.g., hydrogel layer).
  • the afibrotic polymer comprises an afibrotic compound.
  • the afibrotic compound is a compound of Formula (I).
  • the present disclosure features a preparation (e.g., a composition) comprising a plurality (at least any of 3, 6, 12, 25, 50 or more) of a cell-containing device described herein, e.g, a preparation of hydrogel capsules encapsulating genetically modified RPE cells.
  • a preparation e.g., a composition
  • the preparation is a pharmaceutically acceptable composition.
  • the present disclosure features a method of making or manufacturing a device comprising a genetically modified cell described herein.
  • the method comprises providing the genetically modified cell, or a plurality of such cells, and disposing the cell(s) in an enclosing component, e.g., a cell-containing compartment of the device as described herein.
  • the enclosing component comprises a flexible polymer (e.g., PLA, PLG, PEG, CMC, or a polysaccharide, e.g., alginate).
  • the enclosing component comprises an inflexible polymer or metal housing.
  • the surface of the device is chemically modified, e.g., with a compound of Formula (I) as described herein.
  • the present disclosure features a method of evaluating a composition, device or device preparation described herein.
  • the method comprises providing the composition, device or device preparation and evaluating a functional parameter of the composition, device or device preparation.
  • the functional parameter is the amount of the exogenous polypeptide produced by the cells in the composition, device or device preparation in vitro (e.g., when placed in a suitable culture medium) and/or in vivo (e.g., after implant into a subject, e.g., a non-human subject or a human subject).
  • the present disclosure features a method of treating a subject in need of therapy with an exogenous polypeptide expressed by a genetically modified cell described herein.
  • the method comprises administering to the subject a device or device preparation comprising the genetically modified cell.
  • the administering step comprises placing into the subject a pharmaceutically acceptable preparation comprising a plurality of devices, each of which has the ability to produce the exogenous polypeptide.
  • the device or device preparation is administered to, placed in, or provided to a site other than the central nervous system, brain, spinal column, eye, or retina.
  • the method further comprises measuring the amount or activity of the exogenous polypeptide present in a tissue sample removed from the subject, e.g., in plasma separated from a blood sample, a liver biopsy.
  • the tissue sample is removed at 15, 30, 60 or 120 days after administration, implantation, or placement of the device or device preparation.
  • the subject is a human.
  • the patient has been diagnosed with hemophilia A and the polypeptide is a FVIII protein.
  • FIGS. 1A-1D show nucleotide sequences from the human hgl9 genome for four OCRs that contain suitable transcription unit insertion sites for genetically modified cells of the present disclosure, with FIG. 1A (SEQ ID NO:l) showing the reference nucleotide sequence of an OCR on Chr 2, FIG. IB (SEQ ID NO:2) showing the reference nucleotide sequence of an OCR on Chr 5, FIG. 1C (SEQ ID NO:3) showing the reference nucleotide sequence of an OCR on Chr 12, FIG.
  • SEQ ID NO:26 showing the reference nucleotide sequence of an OCR on Chr 8, and bold, italics underlining indicating the 5’ and 3’ boundaries of four specific insertion sites for an exogenous transcription unit encoding an FVIII-BDD protein in a clonal cell line derived from ARPE-19 cells.
  • FIG. 2 shows nucleotide sequences for various exogenous transcription unit elements that are useful to generate exemplary genetically modified cells of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B showing nucleotide sequences of two different promoters (SEQ ID NO: 4 and SEQ ID NO:5)
  • FIG 2C showing the nucleotide sequence of a poly A signal sequence (SEQ ID NO:6)
  • FIG. 2D showing the nucleotide sequence of a complete exemplary transcription unit (SEQ ID NO:7), with underlining indicating the promoter sequence, shading indicating the Kozak sequence, [ORF] indicating the insertion site for a coding sequence for a polypeptide of interest, and bold italics indicating the polyA signal sequence.
  • FIG. 3A shows the amino acid sequence (SEQ ID NO: 8) of an exemplary human FVIII- BDD protein, with underlining indicating the signal peptide.
  • FIG. 3B shows an exemplary codon optimized nucleotide sequence (SEQ ID NO: 9) for expressing the human FVIII-BDD protein of SEQ ID NO: 8 in a genetically modified ARPE-19 cell of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 3C shows the amino acid sequence (SEQ ID NO: 10) of an exemplary human single chain FVIII-BDD protein, with underlining indicating the signal peptide.
  • FIG. 3D shows an exemplary codon optimized nucleotide sequence (SEQ ID NO: 11) for expressing the human single-chain FVIII-BDD protein of SEQ ID NO: 10 in genetically modified ARPE-19 cell of the present disclosure.
  • FIGs. 3E, 3F and 3G show the amino acid sequences (SEQ ID NO: 12, 13 and 14) of other exemplary human single chain FVIII-BDD proteins, with underlining indicating the signal peptide.
  • FIG. 3H shows the amino acid sequence (SEQ ID NO: 15) of another exemplary human FVIII-BDD protein, with underlining indicating the signal peptide.
  • FIG. 4A shows the amino acid sequence (SEQ ID NO: 16) of an exemplary human FIX protein, with underlining indicating the signal peptide.
  • FIG. 4B shows an exemplary codon optimized nucleotide sequence (SEQ ID NO: 17) for expressing the human FIX protein of SEQ ID NO: 16 in a genetically modified ARPE-19 cell of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 5A shows the amino acid sequence (SEQ ID NO: 18) of an exemplary human FVII protein, with underlining indicating the signal peptide.
  • FIG. 5B and FIG. 5C show exemplary codon optimized nucleotide sequences (SEQ ID NO: 19 and SEQ ID NO:20) for expressing the human FVII protein of SEQ ID NO: 18 in a genetically modified ARPE-19 cell of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 6A shows the amino acid sequence (SEQ ID NO:21) of an exemplary human GLA protein, with underlining indicating the signal peptide.
  • FIG. 6B and FIG. 6C show exemplary codon optimized nucleotide sequences (SEQ ID NO:22 and SEQ ID NO:23)) for expressing the human GLA protein of SEQ ID NO:21 in a genetically modified ARPE-19 cell of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 6D shows the amino acid sequence (SEQ ID NO:24) of an exemplary human GLA fusion protein, with underlining indicating the signal peptide.
  • FIG. 6E shows an exemplary codon optimized nucleotide sequence (SEQ ID NO:25) for expressing the human GLA fusion protein of SEQ ID NO:24 in a genetically modified ARPE-19 cell of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 7 illustrates an exemplary device of the disclosure (e.g., a two compartment hydrogel capsule), with lines indicating: a first, inner compartment formed from a polymer covalently attached to a cell binding peptide and genetically modified cells encapsulated therein; a second compartment (e.g., layer); and an afibrotic compound disposed within the second compartment and on the surface of the capsule.
  • a first, inner compartment formed from a polymer covalently attached to a cell binding peptide and genetically modified cells encapsulated therein
  • a second compartment e.g., layer
  • an afibrotic compound disposed within the second compartment and on the surface of the capsule.
  • the present disclosure features genetically modified human cells (e.g., derived from human RPE cells, e.g., ARPE-19 cells), which have been engineered to produce an exogenous polypeptide of interest by inserting an exogenous transcription unit into one or more specific genomic OCRs that have been shown to allow stable, high level expression of a polypeptide encoded by the transcription unit.
  • the present disclosure also provides compositions, devices and device preparations comprising such genetically modified cells.
  • the genetically modified cells, compositions, and devices are useful for delivering a therapeutic polypeptide to a subject in need of treatment with the therapeutic polypeptide.
  • “About” or “approximately” when used herein to modify a numerically defined parameter means that the recited numerical value is within an acceptable functional range for the defined parameter as determined by one of ordinary skill in the art, which will depend in part on how the numerical value is measured or determined, e.g., the limitations of the measurement system, including the acceptable error range for that measurement system. For example, “about” can mean a range of 20% above and below the recited numerical value.
  • a device defined as having a diameter of about 1.5 millimeters (mm) and encapsulating about 5 million (M) cells may have a diameter of 1.2 to 1.8 mm and may encapsulate 4 M to 6 M cells.
  • a preparation of about 100 devices includes preparations having 80 to 120 devices.
  • the term “about” means that the modified parameter may vary by as much as 15%, 10% or 5% above and below the stated numerical value for that parameter.
  • “Acquire” or “acquiring” as used herein, refer to obtaining possession of a value, e.g., a numerical value, or image, or a physical entity (e.g., a sample), by “directly acquiring” or “indirectly acquiring” the value or physical entity.
  • “Directly acquiring” means performing a process (e.g., performing an analytical method or protocol) to obtain the value or physical entity.
  • “Indirectly acquiring” refers to receiving the value or physical entity from another party or source (e.g., a third party laboratory that directly acquired the physical entity or value).
  • Directly acquiring a value or physical entity includes performing a process that includes a physical change in a physical substance or the use of a machine or device. Examples of directly acquiring a value include obtaining a sample from a human subject.
  • Directly acquiring a value includes performing a process that uses a machine or device, e.g., using a fluorescence microscope to acquire fluorescence microscopy data
  • administering refers to implanting, absorbing, ingesting, injecting, placing or otherwise introducing into a subject, an entity described herein (e.g., a device or a preparation of devices), or providing such an entity to a subject for administration.
  • an entity described herein e.g., a device or a preparation of devices
  • Afibrotic means a compound or material that mitigates the foreign body response (FBR) to an implanted device.
  • FBR foreign body response
  • a biological tissue that is induced by implant into that tissue of a device (e.g., a hydrogel capsule) comprising an afibrotic compound (e.g., a hydrogel capsule comprising a polymer covalently modified with a compound listed in Table 3) is lower than the FBR induced by implantation of an afibrotic-null reference device, i.e., a device that lacks any afibrotic compound, but is of substantially the same composition (e.g., same CBP-polymer, same cell type(s)) and structure (e.g., size, shape, no.
  • the degree of the FBR is assessed by the immunological response in the tissue containing the implanted device (e.g., hydrogel capsule), which may include, for example, protein adsorption, macrophages, multinucleated foreign body giant cells, fibroblasts, and angiogenesis, using assays known in the art, e.g., as described in WO 2017/075630, or using one or more of the assays / methods described Vegas, A., et al., Nature Biotechnol (supra), (e.g., subcutaneous cathepsin measurement of implanted capsules, Masson’s tri chrome (MT), hematoxylin or eosin staining of tissue sections, quantification of collagen density, cellular staining and confocal microscopy for macrophages (CD68 or F4/80), myofibroblasts (alpha- muscle actin, SMA) or general cellular deposition, quantification of 79 RNA sequences
  • the FBR is assessed by measuring the levels in the tissue containing the implant of one or more biomarkers of immune response, e.g., cathepsin, TNF-a, IL-13, IL-6, G-CSF, GM-CSF, IL-4, CCL2, or CCL4.
  • biomarkers of immune response e.g., cathepsin, TNF-a, IL-13, IL-6, G-CSF, GM-CSF, IL-4, CCL2, or CCL4.
  • the FBR induced by a device of the invention is at least about 80%, about 85%, about 90%, about 95%, about 99%, or about 100% lower than the FBR induced by an FBR-null reference device, e.g., a device that is substantially identical to the test or claimed device except for lacking the means for mitigating the FBR (e.g., a hydrogel capsule that does not comprise an afibrotic compound but is otherwise substantially identical to the claimed capsule.
  • the FBR (e.g., level of a biomarker(s)) is measured after about 30 minutes, about 1 hour, about 6 hours, about 12 hours, about 1 day, about 2 days, about 3 days, about 4 days, about 1 week, about 2 weeks, about 1 month, about 2 months, about 3 months, about 6 months, or longer.
  • Alpha-gal actosidase A “a-Gal A”, “alpha-D-galactosidase-A”, alpha-galactoside galactohydrolase”, “galactosidase alpha”, and “GLA protein” may be used interchangeably herein and refer to a homodimeric protein comprising the mature amino acid sequence encoded by a wild- type mammalian GLA gene or an amino acid sequence with conservative substitutions thereof.
  • the conservatively substituted GLA protein has enzyme activity that is within 80- 120%, 85-115%, 90-110% or 95-105% of the corresponding wild-type mammalian mature GLA protein, as measured by a GLA activity assay described herein.
  • the wild-type human GLA gene encodes a 429-amino acid polypeptide, of which the N-terminal 31 amino acids constitute a signal peptide.
  • the full DNA sequence of the wild-type human GLA gene, including introns and exons, is available in GenBank Accession No. X14448.1.
  • the amino acid sequence for wild-type human precursor a-Gal A is available in GenBank Accession Nos. X14448.1 and U78027 and shown in FIG. 6A (SEQ ID NO:21).
  • the term “GLA protein” (and any of the aforesaid synonyms) refers to a polypeptide comprising the wild-type mature amino acid sequence shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 6A and optionally preceded by the GLA signal peptide (underlined in FIG 6A) or by a signal peptide for a different secretory protein, e.g., a protein secreted by human cells (e.g., human epithelial cells), e.g., the signal peptide for HSPG2, as shown in FIG. 6D, which is also referred to herein as a GLA fusion protein.
  • a signal peptide for a different secretory protein e.g., a protein secreted by human cells (e.g., human epithelial cells), e.g., the signal peptide for HSPG2, as shown in FIG. 6D, which is also referred to herein as a GLA fusion protein.
  • Cell refers to a human cell that is engineered (genetically modified) or a human cell that is not engineered (not genetically modified).
  • a cell is an immortalized cell, or an engineered cell derived from an immortalized human cell line.
  • the cell is a live cell, e.g., is viable as measured by any technique described herein or known in the art.
  • Cell-binding peptide means a linear or cyclic peptide that comprises an amino acid sequence that is derived from the cell binding domain of a ligand for a cell-adhesion molecule (CAM) (e.g., that mediates cell-matrix junctions or cell-cell junctions).
  • CAM cell-adhesion molecule
  • the CBP is less than 50, 4030, 25, 20, 15 or 10 amino acids in length. In an embodiment, the CBP is between 3 and 12 amino acids, 4 and 10 amino acids in length, or is 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 8, 9 or 10 amino acids in length.
  • the CBP amino acid sequence may be identical to the naturally occurring binding domain sequence or may be a conservatively substituted variant thereof.
  • the CAM ligand is a mammalian protein. In an embodiment, the CAM ligand is a human protein selected from the group of proteins listed in Table 1 below. In an embodiment, the CBP comprises, consists essentially of, or consists of a cell binding sequence listed in Table 1 below or a conservatively substituted variant thereof. In an embodiment, the CBP is an RGD peptide, which means the peptide comprises the amino acid sequence RGD and optionally comprises one or more additional amino acids located at the N-terminus and /or the C-terminus. In an embodiment, the CBP is a cyclic peptide comprising RGD, e.g., one of the cyclic RGD peptides described in Vilaca, H.
  • CBP is a linear peptide comprising RGD and is less than 6 amino acids in length. In an embodiment, the CBP is a linear peptide that consists essentially of RGD or RGDSP.
  • Table 1 Exemplary CAM Ligand Proteins and Cell Binding Sequences “CBP-polymer”, as used herein, means a polymer comprising at least one cell-binding peptide molecule covalently attached to the polymer via a linker. In an embodiment, the polymer in the CBP-polymer is not a peptide or a polypeptide.
  • the polymer in a CBP- polymer is a synthetic or naturally occurring polysaccharide, e.g., an alginate, e.g., a sodium alginate.
  • the linker is an amino acid linker (i.e., consists essentially of a single amino acid, or a peptide of several identical or different amino acids), which is joined via a peptide bond to the N-terminus or C-terminus of the CBP.
  • the C-terminus of an amino acid linker is joined to the N-terminus of the CBP and the N-terminus of the amino acid linker is joined to at least one pendant carboxyl group in the polysaccharide via an amide bond.
  • the structure of the linker-CBP is expressed as G (i -4 ) -CBP, meaning that the linker has one, two, three or four glycine residues.
  • one or more of the monosaccharide moieties in a CBP-polysaccharide, e.g., a CBP-alginate) is not modified with the CBP, e.g, the unmodified moiety has a free carboxyl group or lacks a modifiable pendant carboxyl group.
  • the number of polysaccharide moieties with a covalently attached CBP is less than any of the following values: 99%, 95%, 90%, 80%, 70%, 60%, 50%, 40% 30%, 20%, 10%, 5%, 1%.
  • Cell -binding polypeptide means a polypeptide of at least 50, at least 75, or at least 100 amino acids in length and comprising the amino acid sequence of a cell binding domain of a CAM ligand, or a conservatively substituted variant thereof.
  • the CAM ligand is a mammalian protein.
  • the CBPP amino acid comprises the naturally occurring amino acid sequence of a full-length CAM ligand, e.g., one of the proteins listed in Table 1 below, or a conservatively substituted variant thereof.
  • Cell -binding substance means any chemical, biological or other type of substance (e.g., a small organic compound, a peptide, a polypeptide) that is capable of mimicking at least one activity of a ligand for a cell-adhesion molecule (CAM) or other cell- surface molecule that mediates cell-matrix junctions or cell-cell junctions or other receptor- mediated signaling.
  • the CBS when present in a polymer composition encapsulating live cells, the CBS is capable of forming a transient or permanent bond or contact with one or more of the cells.
  • the CBS facilitates interactions between two or more live cells encapsulated in the polymer composition.
  • the CBS is physically attached to one or more polymer molecules in the polymer composition.
  • the CBS is a cell binding peptide or cell-binding polypeptide, as defined herein.
  • “Conservatively modified variants” or conservative substitution”, as used herein, refers to a variant of a reference peptide or polypeptide that is identical to the reference molecule, except for having one or more conservative amino acid substitutions in its amino acid sequence.
  • a conservatively modified variant consists of an amino acid sequence that is at least 70%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 97%, 98% or 99% identical to the reference amino acid sequence.
  • a conservative amino acid substitution refers to substitution of an amino acid with an amino acid having similar characteristics (e.g., charge, side-chain size, hydrophobicity/hydrophilicity, backbone conformation and rigidity, etc.) and which has minimal impact on the biological activity of the resulting substituted peptide or polypeptide.
  • Conservative substitution tables of functionally similar amino acids are well known in the art, and exemplary substitutions grouped by functional features are set forth in Table 2 below.
  • a cell-binding peptide or an FVIII protein that consists essentially of a recited amino acid sequence may also include one or more amino acids, including substitutions in the recited amino acid sequence, of one or more amino acid residues, which do not materially affect the relevant biological activity of the cell-binding peptide or the FVIII protein, respectively.
  • “Derived from”, as used herein with respect to a cell or cells, refers to cells obtained from tissue, cell lines, or cells, which optionally are then cultured, passaged, immortalized, differentiated and/or induced, etc. to produce the derived cell(s).
  • Device refers to any implantable object (e.g., a particle, a hydrogel capsule, an implant, a medical device), which contains live, genetically modified human cells (e.g., derived from RPE cells) capable of expressing, and optionally secreting, an exogenous polypeptide following implant of the device, and has a configuration that supports the viability of the cells by allowing cell nutrients to enter the device.
  • the device allows release from the device of metabolic byproducts generated by the cells.
  • Effective amount refers to an amount of genetically modified cells (e.g., derived from human cells (e.g., epithelial cells)) producing an exogenous polypeptide or a device preparation producing the polypeptide that is sufficient to elicit a desired biological response.
  • the desired biological response is an increase in levels of the exogenous polypeptide within the cells, or for secreted polypeptides, in a tissue sample removed from a subject treated with (e.g., implanted with) the genetically modified cells, a device or a device preparation containing such cells.
  • the effective amount may vary depending on such factors as the desired biological endpoint, the pharmacokinetics of the exogenous polypeptide, composition or device, the condition being treated, the mode of administration, and the age and health of the subject.
  • An effective amount encompasses therapeutic and prophylactic treatment.
  • an “endogenous nucleic acid” as used herein, is a nucleic acid that occurs naturally in a subject cell.
  • an “endogenous polypeptide,” as used herein, is a polypeptide that occurs naturally in a subject cell.
  • Engineerered human cell and “genetically modified human cell”, may be used interchangeably herein, and each term means a human cell (e.g., an epithelial cell) having a non- naturally occurring genetic alteration (e.g., in the cellular genome), and typically comprises an exogenous nucleic acid sequence (e.g., DNA or RNA) not present (or present at a different level than) in an otherwise similar human cell (e.g., epithelial cell) that is not engineered.
  • an engineered human cell e.g., engineered RPE cell
  • the exogenous nucleic acid sequence is chromosomal (e.g., the exogenous nucleic acid sequence is an exogenous sequence disposed in endogenous chromosomal sequence) or is extra chromosomal (e.g., a non- integrated expression vector).
  • the exogenous nucleic acid sequence comprises an RNA sequence, e.g., an mRNA.
  • the exogenous nucleic acid sequence comprises a chromosomal or extra-chromosomal exogenous nucleic acid sequence that comprises a sequence which is expressed as RNA, e.g., mRNA or a regulatory RNA.
  • the exogenous nucleic acid sequence comprises a first chromosomal or extra-chromosomal exogenous nucleic acid sequence that modulates the conformation or expression of a second nucleic acid sequence the second nucleic acid sequence can be exogenous or endogenous.
  • an engineered cell can comprise an exogenous nucleic acid that controls the expression of an endogenous sequence.
  • the engineered cell comprises an exogenous nucleic acid sequence which comprises a codon optimized coding sequence for a polypeptide of interest and achieves higher expression of the polypeptide than a naturally-occurring coding sequence.
  • the codon optimized coding sequence may be generated using a commercially available algorithm, e.g., GeneOptimizer (ThermoFisher Scientific), OptimumGeneTM (GenScript, Piscataway, NJ USA), GeneGPS® (ATUM, Newark, CA USA), or Java Codon Adaptation Tool (JCat, www.jcat.de, Grote, A. et al., Nucleic Acids Research, Vol 33, Issue suppl 2, pp. W526-W531 (2005).
  • an engineered cell e.g., engineered epithelial cell, e.g., engineered RPE cell, e.g., engineered ARPE-19 cell
  • the engineered cell is not an islet cell, as defined herein.
  • exogenous nucleic acid is a nucleic acid that does not occur naturally in a subject cell.
  • exogenous polypeptide is a polypeptide that is encoded by an exogenous nucleic acid in a subject cell.
  • Reference to an amino acid position of a specific sequence means the position of said amino acid in a reference amino acid sequence, e.g., sequence of a full- length mature (after signal peptide cleavage) wild-type protein (unless otherwise stated), and does not exclude the presence of variations, e.g., deletions, insertions and/or substitutions at other positions in the reference amino acid sequence.
  • Factor VII protein or “FVII protein” as used herein, means a polypeptide that comprises the amino acid sequence of a naturally occurring factor VII protein or variant thereof that has a FVII biological activity, e.g., promoting blood clotting, as determined by an art-recognized assay, unless otherwise specified.
  • Naturally occurring FVII exists as a single chain zymogen, a zymogen like two-chain polypeptide and a fully activated two-chain form (FVIIa).
  • reference to FVII includes single-chain and two-chain forms thereof, including zymogen-like and FVIIa.
  • FVII proteins that may be produced by a genetically modified cell described herein (e.g., derived from a human epithelial cell line, e.g., the ARPE-19 cell line), include wild-type primate (e.g., human), porcine, canine, and murine proteins, as well as variants of such wild-type proteins, including fragments, mutants, variants with one or more amino acid substitutions and / or deletions.
  • a variant FVII protein is capable of being activated to the fully activated two-chain form (Factor Vila) that has at least 50%, 75%, 90% or more (including >100%) of the activity of wild-type Factor Vila.
  • FVII and FVIIa are known, e.g., marzeptacog alfa (activated) (MarzAA) and the variants described in European Patent No. 1373493, US Patent No. 7771996, US Patent No. 9476037 and US published application No. US20080058255.
  • Factor VII biological activity may be quantified by an art recognized assay, unless otherwise specified.
  • FVII biological activity in a sample of a biological fluid may be quantified by (i) measuring the amount of Factor Xa produced in a system comprising tissue factor (TF) embedded in a lipid membrane and Factor X (Persson et ak, ./. Biol. Chem. 272:19919-19924, 1997); (ii) measuring Factor X hydrolysis in an aqueous system; (iii) measuring its physical binding to TF using an instrument based on surface plasmon resonance (Persson, FEBS Letts.
  • FVII activity is assessed by a commercially available chromogenic assay (BIOPHEN FVII, HYPHEN BioMed Neuville sur Oise, France), in which the biological sample containing FVII is mixed with thromboplastin calcium, Factor X and SXa-11 (a chromogenic substrate specific for Factor Xa.
  • Fractor VIII protein or “FVIII protein” as used herein, means a polypeptide that comprises the amino acid sequence of a naturally occurring factor VIII polypeptide or variant thereof that has an FVIII biological activity, e.g., coagulation activity, as determined by an art-recognized assay, unless otherwise specified.
  • FVIII proteins that may be expressed by a genetically modified cell described herein (e.g., derived from a human epithelial cell line, e.g., the ARPE-19 cell line), include wild-type primate (e.g., human), porcine, canine, and murine proteins, as well as variants of such wild-type proteins, including fragments, mutants, variants with one or more amino acid substitutions and / or deletions, B-domain deletion (BDD) variants, single chain variants and fusions of any of the foregoing wild-type or variants with a half-life extending polypeptide.
  • wild-type primate e.g., human
  • porcine porcine
  • canine canine
  • murine proteins as well as variants of such wild-type proteins, including fragments, mutants, variants with one or more amino acid substitutions and / or deletions
  • BDD B-domain deletion
  • the cells are engineered to encode a precursor factor VIII polypeptide (e.g., with the signal sequence) with a full or partial deletion of the B domain.
  • the cells are engineered to encode a single chain factor VIII polypeptide which contains a variant FVIII protein preferably has at least 50%, 75%, 90% or more (including >100%) of the coagulation activity of the corresponding wild-type factor VIII.
  • Assays for measuring the coagulation activity of FVIII proteins include the one stage or two stage coagulation assay (Rizza et al., 1982, Coagulation assay of FVIIEC and FIXa in Bloom ed. The Hemophelias. NY Churchill Livingston 1992) or the chromogenic substrate FVIIFC assay (Rosen, S. 1984. Scand .1 Haematol 33:139-145, suppl.).
  • FVIII-BDD variants include, e.g., variants with the full or partial B-domain deletions disclosed in any of the following U.S. Patent Nos: 4,868,112 (e.g., col. 2, line 2 to col. 19, line 21 and table 2); 5,112,950 (e.g., col. 2, lines 55-68, FIG. 2, and example 1); 5,171,844 (e.g., col. 4, line 22 to col. 5, line 36); 5,543,502 (e.g., col. 2, lines 17-46); 5,595,886; 5,610,278; 5,789,203 (e.g., col. 2, lines 26-51 and examples 5-8); 5,972,885 (e.g., col.
  • a FVIII-BDD protein produced by a genetically modified cell described herein has one or more of the following deletions of amino acids in the B-domain: (i) most of the B domain except for amino-terminal B-domain sequences essential for intracellular processing of the primary translation product into two polypeptide chains (WO 91/09122); (ii) a deletion of amino acids 747- 1638 (Hoeben R. C., et al. J. Biol. Chem.
  • a FVIII-BDD protein retains any of the following B-domain amino acids or amino acid sequences: (i) one or more N-linked glycosylation sites in the B-domain, e.g., residues 757, 784, 828, 900, 963, or optionally 943, first 226 amino acids or first 163 amino acids (Miao, H. Z., et al., Blood 103(a): 3412-3419 (2004), Kasuda, A., et al., J. Thromb. Haemost. 6: 1352-1359 (2008), and Pipe, S. W., et al., J. Thromb. Haemost. 9: 2235-2242 (2011).
  • the FVIII-BDD protein is a single-chain variant generated by substitution or deletion of one or more amino acids in the furin protease recognition sequence LKRHQR at amino acids 768-773 in SEQ ID NO: 8 that prevents proteolytic cleavage at this site, including any of the substitutions at the R1645 and/or R1648 positions described in U.S. Patent Nos. 10,023,628, 9,394,353 and 9,670,267.
  • any of the above FVIII-BDD proteins may further comprise one or more of the following variations: a F309S substitution to improve expression of the FVIII-BDD protein (Miao, H. Z., et al., Blood 103(a): 3412-3419 (2004); albumin fusions (WO 2011/020866); and Fc fusions (WO 04/101740).
  • FVIII-BDD amino acid positions referenced herein refer to the positions in full-length human FVIII, unless otherwise specified.
  • “Factor IX protein” or “FIX protein”, as used herein, means a polypeptide that comprises the amino acid sequence of a naturally occurring factor IX protein or variant thereof that has a FIX biological activity, e.g., coagulation activity, as determined by an art-recognized assay, unless otherwise specified.
  • FIX is produced as an inactive zymogen, which is converted to an active form by factor XIa excision of the activation peptide to produce a heavy chain and a light chain held together by one or more disulfide bonds.
  • FIX proteins that may be produced by a genetically modified described herein (e.g., derived from an RPE cell line, e.g., the ARPE-19 cell line), include wild-type primate (e.g., human), porcine, canine, and murine proteins, as well as variants of such wild-type proteins, including fragments, mutants, variants with one or more amino acid substitutions and / or deletions and fusions of any of the foregoing wild-type or variant proteins with a half-life extending polypeptide.
  • cells are engineered to encode a full- length wild-type human factor IX polypeptide (e.g., with the signal sequence) or a functional variant thereof.
  • a variant FIX protein preferably has at least 50%, 75%, 90% or more (including >100%) of the coagulation activity of wild-type factor VIX.
  • Assays for measuring the coagulation activity of FIX proteins include the Biophen Factor IX assay (Hyphen BioMed) and the one stage clotting assay (activated partial thromboplastin time (aPTT), e.g., as described in EP 2 032 607, thrombin generation time assay (TGA) and rotational thromboelastometry, e.g., as described in WO 2012/006624.
  • FIX variants are known and may be expressed by engineered cells encapsulated in a device described herein, including any of the functional FIX variants described in the following international patent publications: WO 02/040544 at page 4, lines 9-30 and page
  • the FIX polypeptide comprises a wild-type or variant sequence fused to a heterologous polypeptide or non-polypeptide moiety extending the half-life of the FIX protein.
  • exemplary half-life extending moieties include Fc, albumin, a PAS sequence, transferrin, CTP (28 amino acid C-terminal peptide (CTP) of human chorionic gonadotropin (hCG) with its 4 O-glycans), polyethylene glycol (PEG), hydroxy ethyl starch (HES), albumin binding polypeptide, albumin-binding small molecules, or any combination thereof.
  • FIX polypeptide is the rFIXFc protein described in WO 2012/006624, which is an FIXFc single chain (FIXFc-sc) and an Fc single chain (Fc-sc) bound together through two disulfide bonds in the hinge region of Fc.
  • FIXFc-sc FIXFc single chain
  • Fc-sc Fc single chain
  • FIX variants also include gain and loss of function variants.
  • An example of a gain of function variant is the “Padua” variant of human FIX, which has a L (leucine) at position 338 of the mature protein instead of an R (arginine) (corresponding to amino acid position 384 of SEQ ID NO: 16), and has greater catalytic and coagulant activity compared to wild-type human FIX (Chang et al., J. Biol. Chem., 273:12089-94 (1998)).
  • An example of a loss of function variant is an alanine substituted for lysine in the fifth amino acid position from the beginning of the mature protein, which results in a protein with reduced binding to collagen IV (e.g., loss of function).
  • Islet cell means a cell that comprises any naturally occurring or any synthetically created, or modified, cell that is intended to recapitulate, mimic or otherwise express, in part or in whole, the functions, in part or in whole, of the cells of the pancreatic islets of Langerhans.
  • the term “islet cell” includes a glucose-responsive, insulin producing cell derived from a stem cell, e.g., from an induced pluripotent stem cell line.
  • Polymer composition is a composition (e.g., a solution, mixture) comprising one or more polymers.
  • polymers includes homopolymers, heteropolymers, co-polymers, block polymers, block co-polymers and can be both natural and synthetic. Homopolymers contain one type of building block, or monomer, whereas co-polymers contain more than one type of monomer.
  • Polypeptide refers to a polymer comprising amino acid residues linked through peptide bonds and having at least two, and in some embodiments, at least 3, 4, 5, 10, 50, 75,100, 150 or 200 amino acid residues.
  • Prevention refers to a treatment that comprises administering a composition (or preparation) of devices encapsulating genetically modified cells that express an exogenous polypeptide, prior to the onset of one or more symptoms of a disease or condition that is amenable to treatment with the exogenous polypeptide, to preclude the physical manifestation of the symptom(s).
  • prevention require that signs or symptoms of a disease or condition have not yet developed or have not yet been observed.
  • RPE cell refers to a cell having one or more of the following characteristics: a) it comprises a retinal pigment epithelial cell (RPE) (e.g., cultured using an RPE cell line, e.g., the ARPE-19 cell line (ATCC ® CRL-2302TM)) or a cell derived or engineered therefrom, e.g., by stably transfecting cells cultured from the ARPE-19 cell line with an exogenous sequence that encodes a polypeptide of interest or inserting the exogenous sequence into one of the specific OCR insertion sites described herein, a cell derived from a primary cell culture of RPE cells, a cell isolated directly (without long term culturing, e.g., less than 5 or 10 passages or rounds of cell division since isolation) from naturally occurring RPE cells, e.g., from a human or other mammal, a cell derived from a transformed, an immortalized, or a long term (e.g.,
  • RPE retina
  • RPE cells include ARPE-19-SEAP-2-neo cells, RPE-J cells, and hTERT RPE-1 cells.
  • an RPE described herein is engineered, e.g., to have a new property, e.g., the cell is genetically modified by inserting at least one exogenous transcription unit into one or more of the OCR locations described herein. In other embodiments, an RPE cell is not engineered.
  • Sequence identity when used herein to refer to two nucleotide sequences or two amino acid sequences, means the two sequences are the same within a specified region, or have the same nucleotides or amino acids at a specified percentage of nucleotide or amino acid positions within the specified when the two sequences are compared and aligned for maximum correspondence over a comparison window or designated region. Sequence identity may be determined using standard techniques known in the art including, but not limited to, any of the algorithms described in US Patent Application Publication No. 2017/02334455 Al. In an embodiment, the specified percentage of identical nucleotide or amino acid positions is at least about 80%, 85%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99% or higher.
  • Spherical as used herein, mean a device (e.g., a hydrogel capsule or other particle) having a curved surface that forms a sphere (e.g., a completely round ball) or sphere-like shape, which may have waves and undulations, e.g., on the surface.
  • Spheres and sphere-like objects can be mathematically defined by rotation of circles, ellipses, or a combination around each of the three perpendicular axes, a, b, and c. For a sphere, the three axes are the same length.
  • a sphere-like shape is an ellipsoid (for its averaged surface) with semi -principal axes within 10%, or 5%, or 2.5% of each other.
  • the diameter of a sphere or sphere-like shape is the average diameter, such as the average of the semi-principal axes.
  • Spheroid as that term is used herein to refer to a device (e.g., a hydrogel capsule or other particle), means the device has (i) a perfect or classical oblate spheroid or prolate spheroid shape or (ii) has a surface that roughly forms a spheroid, e.g., may have waves and undulations and/or may be an ellipsoid (for its averaged surface) with semi-principal axes within 100% of each other.
  • Subject refers to a human or non-human animal.
  • the subject is a human (i.e., a male or female) of any age group, e.g., a pediatric human subject (e.g., infant, child, adolescent) or adult human subject (e.g., young adult, middle-aged adult, or senior adult)).
  • the subject is a non-human animal, for example, a mammal (e.g., a mouse, a dog, a primate (e.g., a cynomolgus monkey or a rhesus monkey).
  • the subject is a commercially relevant mammal (e.g., cattle, pig, horse, sheep, goat, cat, or dog) or a bird (e.g., a commercially relevant bird such as a chicken, duck, goose, or turkey).
  • the animal is a mammal.
  • the animal may be a male or female and at any stage of development.
  • a non-human animal may be a transgenic animal.
  • Transcription unit means a DNA sequence, e.g., present in an exogenous nucleic acid, that comprises at least a promoter sequence operably linked to a coding sequence, and may also comprise one or more additional elements that control or enhance transcription of the coding sequence into RNA molecules or translation of the RNA molecules into polypeptide molecules.
  • a transcription unit also comprises a poiyadenylation (poly A) signal sequence and poly A site.
  • a transcription unit is present as an exogenous sequence integrated in one or more of the specific OCR insertion locations described herein.
  • Treatment,” “treat,” and “treating” as used herein refers to one or more of reducing, reversing, alleviating, delaying the onset of, or inhibiting the progress of one or more of a symptom, manifestation, or underlying cause, of a disease (e.g., hemophilia A).
  • treating comprises reducing, reversing, alleviating, delaying the onset of, or inhibiting the progress of a symptom or condition associated with the disease.
  • treating comprises increasing levels of a therapeutic polypeptide in at least one tissue of a subject in need thereof, e.g., in one or more of plasma, liver, kidney and heart.
  • treatment require that signs or symptoms associated with the disease or condition have developed or have been observed.
  • treatment may be administered in the absence of signs or symptoms of the disease or condition, e.g., in preventive treatment.
  • treatment may be administered to a susceptible individual prior to the onset of symptoms (e.g., due to a history of symptoms and/or genetic or other susceptibility factors). Treatment may also be continued after symptoms have resolved, for example, to delay or prevent recurrence.
  • treatment comprises prevention and in other embodiments it does not.
  • C1-C 6 alkyl is intended to encompass, Ci, C2, C3, C4, C5, C , Ci- Ce, C1-C5, C1-C4, C1-C 3 , C1-C2, C 2 -C 6 , C2-C5, C2-C4, C2-C3, C 3 -C 6 , C 3 -C5, C 3 -C4, C 4 -C 6 , C4-C5, and C 5 -C 6 alkyl.
  • alkyl refers to a radical of a straight-chain or branched saturated hydrocarbon group having from 1 to 24 carbon atoms (“C 1 -C 24 alkyl”).
  • an alkyl group has 1 to 12 carbon atoms (“C 1 -C 12 alkyl”), 1 to 10 carbon atoms (“C 1 -C 10 alkyl”), 1 to 8 carbon atoms (“Ci-Cs alkyl”), 1 to 6 carbon atoms (“C 1 -C 6 alkyl”), 1 to 5 carbon atoms (“C 1 -C 5 alkyl”), 1 to 4 carbon atoms (“Ci-C 4 alkyl”), 1 to 3 carbon atoms (“C 1 -C 3 alkyl”), 1 to 2 carbon atoms (“C 1 -C 2 alkyl”), or 1 carbon atom (“Ci alkyl”).
  • an alkyl group has 2 to 6 carbon atoms (“C 2 -C 6 alkyl”).
  • C 1 -C 6 alkyl groups include methyl (Ci), ethyl (C 2 ), n-propyl (C 3 ), isopropyl (C 3 ), n-butyl (C4), tert-butyl (C4), sec-butyl (C4), iso-butyl (C4), n- pentyl (C 5 ), 3-pentanyl (C 5 ), amyl (C 5 ), neopentyl (C 5 ), 3-methyl-2-butanyl (C 5 ), tertiary amyl (C 5 ), and n-hexyl (Cr,).
  • alkyl groups include n-heptyl (C 7 ), n-octyl (Cx) and the like.
  • Each instance of an alkyl group may be independently optionally substituted, i.e., unsubstituted (an “unsubstituted alkyl”) or substituted (a “substituted alkyl”) with one or more substituents; e.g., for instance from 1 to 5 substituents, 1 to 3 substituents, or 1 substituent.
  • alkenyl refers to a radical of a straight-chain or branched hydrocarbon group having from 2 to 24 carbon atoms, one or more carbon-carbon double bonds, and no triple bonds (“C 2 -C 24 alkenyl”).
  • an alkenyl group has 2 to 12 carbon atoms (“C 2 - C 12 alkenyl”), 2 to 10 carbon atoms (“C 2 -C 10 alkenyl”), 2 to 8 carbon atoms (“C 2 -C 8 alkenyl”), 2 to 6 carbon atoms (“C 2 -C 6 alkenyl”), 2 to 5 carbon atoms (“C 2 -C 5 alkenyl”), 2 to 4 carbon atoms (“C 2 -C 4 alkenyl”), 2 to 3 carbon atoms (“C 2 -C 3 alkenyl”), or 2 carbon atoms (“C 2 alkenyl”).
  • the one or more carbon-carbon double bonds can be internal (such as in 2-butenyl) or terminal (such as in 1-butenyl).
  • Examples of C 2 -C 4 alkenyl groups include ethenyl (C 2 ), 1-propenyl (C 3 ), 2- propenyl (C 3 ), 1-butenyl (C 4 ), 2-butenyl (C 4 ), butadienyl (C 4 ), and the like.
  • Examples of C 2 -C 6 alkenyl groups include the aforementioned C 2-4 alkenyl groups as well as pentenyl (C 5 ), pentadienyl (C 5 ), hexenyl (Cr,), and the like.
  • alkenyl group may be independently optionally substituted, i.e., unsubstituted (an “unsubstituted alkenyl”) or substituted (a “substituted alkenyl”) with one or more substituents e.g., for instance from 1 to 5 substituents, 1 to 3 substituents, or 1 substituent.
  • alkynyl refers to a radical of a straight-chain or branched hydrocarbon group having from 2 to 24 carbon atoms, one or more carbon-carbon triple bonds (“C2-C24 alkenyl”).
  • an alkynyl group has 2 to 12 carbon atoms (“C2-C12 alkynyl”), 2 to 10 carbon atoms (“C2-C10 alkynyl”), 2 to 8 carbon atoms (“C2-C8 alkynyl”), 2 to 6 carbon atoms (“C2-C6 alkynyl”), 2 to 5 carbon atoms (“C2-C5 alkynyl”), 2 to 4 carbon atoms (“C2- C4 alkynyl”), 2 to 3 carbon atoms (“C2-C3 alkynyl”), or 2 carbon atoms (“C2 alkynyl”).
  • the one or more carbon-carbon triple bonds can be internal (such as in 2-butynyl) or terminal (such as in 1- butynyl).
  • Examples of C2-C4 alkynyl groups include ethynyl (C2), 1-propynyl (C3), 2-propynyl (C3), 1-butynyl (C4), 2-butynyl (C4), and the like.
  • Each instance of an alkynyl group may be independently optionally substituted, i.e., unsubstituted (an “unsubstituted alkynyl”) or substituted (a “substituted alkynyl”) with one or more substituents e.g., for instance from 1 to 5 substituents, 1 to 3 substituents, or 1 substituent.
  • heteroalkyl refers to a non-cyclic stable straight or branched chain, or combinations thereof, including at least one carbon atom and at least one heteroatom selected from the group consisting of O, N, P, Si, and S, and wherein the nitrogen and sulfur atoms may optionally be oxidized, and the nitrogen heteroatom may optionally be quatemized.
  • the heteroatom(s) O, N, P, S, and Si may be placed at any position of the heteroalkyl group.
  • heteroalkyl Up to two or three heteroatoms may be consecutive, such as, for example, -CH 2 -NH-OCH 3 and -CH 2 -O- Si(CH 3 ) 3 .
  • heteroalkyl is recited, followed by recitations of specific heteroalkyl groups, such as -CH 2 O, -NR C R d , or the like, it will be understood that the terms heteroalkyl and -CH 2 O or -NR C R D are not redundant or mutually exclusive. Rather, the specific heteroalkyl groups are recited to add clarity.
  • heteroalkyl should not be interpreted herein as excluding specific heteroalkyl groups, such as -CH 2 O, -NR C R U , or the like.
  • Each instance of a heteroalkyl group may be independently optionally substituted, i.e., unsubstituted (an “unsubstituted heteroalkyl”) or substituted (a “substituted heteroalkyl”) with one or more substituents e.g, for instance from 1 to 5 substituents, 1 to 3 substituents, or 1 substituent.
  • alkylene alkenylene, alkynylene, or heteroalkylene, alone or as part of another substituent, mean, unless otherwise stated, a divalent radical derived from an alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, or heteroalkyl, respectively.
  • alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene, or heteroalkylene group may be described as, e.g., a Ci-C 6 -membered alkylene, C2-C6-membered alkenylene, Ci-C 6 -membered alkynylene, or Ci-C 6 -membered heteroalkylene, wherein the term “membered” refers to the non-hydrogen atoms within the moiety.
  • heteroatoms can also occupy either or both chain termini (e.g., alkyleneoxy, alkylenedioxy, alkyleneamino, alkylenediamino, and the like).
  • aryl refers to a radical of a monocyclic or polycyclic (e.g., bicyclic or tricyclic) 4n+2 aromatic ring system (e.g, having 6, 10, or 14 p electrons shared in a cyclic array) having 6-14 ring carbon atoms and zero heteroatoms provided in the aromatic ring system (“C 6 - Ci 4 aryl”).
  • an aryl group has six ring carbon atoms (“C 6 aryl”; e.g, phenyl).
  • an aryl group has ten ring carbon atoms (“Cio aryl”; e.g, naphthyl such as 1-naphthyl and 2-naphthyl). In some embodiments, an aryl group has fourteen ring carbon atoms (“Ci4 aryl”; e.g, anthracyl).
  • An aryl group may be described as, e.g., a C 6 -Cio-membered aryl, wherein the term “membered” refers to the non-hydrogen ring atoms within the moiety.
  • Aryl groups include phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, and tetrahydronaphthyl.
  • Each instance of an aryl group may be independently optionally substituted, i.e., unsubstituted (an “unsubstituted aryl”) or substituted (a “substituted aryl”) with one or more substituents.
  • heteroaryl refers to a radical of a 5-10 membered monocyclic or bicyclic 4n+2 aromatic ring system (e.g, having 6 or 10 p electrons shared in a cyclic array) having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms provided in the aromatic ring system, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur (“5-10 membered heteroaryl”).
  • heteroaryl groups that contain one or more nitrogen atoms, the point of attachment can be a carbon or nitrogen atom, as valency permits.
  • Heteroaryl bicyclic ring systems can include one or more heteroatoms in one or both rings.
  • Heteroaryl also includes ring systems wherein the heteroaryl ring, as defined above, is fused with one or more aryl groups wherein the point of attachment is either on the aryl or heteroaryl ring, and in such instances, the number of ring members designates the number of ring members in the fused (aryl/heteroaryl) ring system.
  • Bicyclic heteroaryl groups wherein one ring does not contain a heteroatom e.g, indolyl, quinolinyl, carbazolyl, and the like
  • the point of attachment can be on either ring, i.e., either the ring bearing a heteroatom (e.g 2-indolyl) or the ring that does not contain a heteroatom (e.g, 5- indolyl).
  • a heteroaryl group may be described as, e.g., a 6-10-membered heteroaryl, wherein the term “membered” refers to the non-hydrogen ring atoms within the moiety.
  • a heteroaryl group is a 5-10 membered aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms provided in the aromatic ring system, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur (“5-10 membered heteroaryl”).
  • a heteroaryl group is a 5-8 membered aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms provided in the aromatic ring system, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur (“5-8 membered heteroaryl”).
  • a heteroaryl group is a 5-6 membered aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms provided in the aromatic ring system, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur (“5-6 membered heteroaryl”).
  • the 5-6 membered heteroaryl has 1-3 ring heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur.
  • the 5-6 membered heteroaryl has 1-2 ring heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur.
  • the 5-6 membered heteroaryl has 1 ring heteroatom selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur.
  • Each instance of a heteroaryl group may be independently optionally substituted, i.e., unsubstituted (an “unsubstituted heteroaryl”) or substituted (a “substituted heteroaryl”) with one or more substituents.
  • Exemplary 5-membered heteroaryl groups containing one heteroatom include, without limitation, pyrrolyl, furanyl and thiophenyl.
  • Exemplary 5-membered heteroaryl groups containing two heteroatoms include, without limitation, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, and isothiazolyl.
  • Exemplary 5-membered heteroaryl groups containing three heteroatoms include, without limitation, triazolyl, oxadiazolyl, and thiadiazolyl.
  • Exemplary 5-membered heteroaryl groups containing four heteroatoms include, without limitation, tetrazolyl.
  • Exemplary 6- membered heteroaryl groups containing one heteroatom include, without limitation, pyridinyl.
  • Exemplary 6-membered heteroaryl groups containing two heteroatoms include, without limitation, pyridazinyl, pyrimidinyl, and pyrazinyl.
  • Exemplary 6-membered heteroaryl groups containing three or four heteroatoms include, without limitation, triazinyl and tetrazinyl, respectively.
  • Exemplary 7-membered heteroaryl groups containing one heteroatom include, without limitation, azepinyl, oxepinyl, and thiepinyl.
  • Exemplary 5,6-bicyclic heteroaryl groups include, without limitation, indolyl, isoindolyl, indazolyl, benzotriazolyl, benzothiophenyl, isobenzothiophenyl, benzofuranyl, benzoisofuranyl, benzimidazolyl, benzoxazolyl, benzisoxazolyl, benzoxadiazolyl, benzthiazolyl, benzisothiazolyl, benzthiadiazolyl, indolizinyl, and purinyl.
  • Exemplary 6,6-bicyclic heteroaryl groups include, without limitation, naphthyridinyl, pteridinyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, cinnolinyl, quinoxalinyl, phthalazinyl, and quinazolinyl.
  • Other exemplary heteroaryl groups include heme and heme derivatives.
  • arylene and “ heteroaryl ene,” alone or as part of another substituent, mean a divalent radical derived from an aryl and heteroaryl, respectively.
  • cycloalkyl refers to a radical of a non-aromatic cyclic hydrocarbon group having from 3 to 10 ring carbon atoms (“C 3 -C 10 cycloalkyl”) and zero heteroatoms in the non aromatic ring system.
  • a cycloalkyl group has 3 to 8 ring carbon atoms (“C 3 - C 8 cycloalkyl”), 3 to 6 ring carbon atoms (“C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl”), or 5 to 10 ring carbon atoms (“C 5 - C 10 cycloalkyl”).
  • a cycloalkyl group may be described as, e.g., a C 4 -C 7 -membered cycloalkyl, wherein the term “membered” refers to the non-hydrogen ring atoms within the moiety.
  • Exemplary C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl groups include, without limitation, cyclopropyl (C 3 ), cyclopropenyl (C 3 ), cyclobutyl (C 4 ), cyclobutenyl (C 4 ), cyclopentyl (C 5 ), cyclopentenyl (C 5 ), cyclohexyl (Cr,), cyclohexenyl (Ce), cyclohexadienyl (Ce), and the like.
  • Exemplary C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl groups include, without limitation, the aforementioned C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl groups as well as cycloheptyl (C7), cycloheptenyl (C7), cycloheptadienyl (C7), cycloheptatrienyl (C7), cyclooctyl (Cs), cyclooctenyl (Cs), cubanyl (Cs), bicyclo[l.l.l]pentanyl (C 5 ), bicyclo[2.2.2]octanyl (Cs), bicyclo[2.1.1]hexanyl (Ce), bicyclo[3.1.1]heptanyl (C 7 ), and the like.
  • Exemplary C 3 -C 10 cycloalkyl groups include, without limitation, the aforementioned C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl groups as well as cyclononyl (C 9 ), cyclononenyl (C 9 ), cyclodecyl (C 10 ), cyclodecenyl (C 10 ), octahy dro- 1 //-i ndeny 1 (C 9 ), decahydronaphthalenyl (C 10 ), spiro [4.5] decanyl (C 10 ), and the like.
  • the cycloalkyl group is either monocyclic (“monocyclic cycloalkyl”) or contain a fused, bridged or spiro ring system such as a bicyclic system (“bicyclic cycloalkyl”) and can be saturated or can be partially unsaturated.
  • “Cycloalkyl” also includes ring systems wherein the cycloalkyl ring, as defined above, is fused with one or more aryl groups wherein the point of attachment is on the cycloalkyl ring, and in such instances, the number of carbons continue to designate the number of carbons in the cycloalkyl ring system.
  • Each instance of a cycloalkyl group may be independently optionally substituted, i.e., unsubstituted (an “unsubstituted cycloalkyl”) or substituted (a “substituted cycloalkyl”) with one or more substituents.
  • Heterocyclyl refers to a radical of a 3- to 10-membered non-aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1 to 4 ring heteroatoms, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, boron, phosphorus, and silicon (“3-10 membered heterocyclyl”).
  • the point of attachment can be a carbon or nitrogen atom, as valency permits.
  • a heterocyclyl group can either be monocyclic (“monocyclic heterocyclyl”) or a fused, bridged or spiro ring system such as a bicyclic system (“bicyclic heterocyclyl”), and can be saturated or can be partially unsaturated.
  • Heterocyclyl bicyclic ring systems can include one or more heteroatoms in one or both rings.
  • Heterocyclyl also includes ring systems wherein the heterocyclyl ring, as defined above, is fused with one or more cycloalkyl groups wherein the point of attachment is either on the cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl ring, or ring systems wherein the heterocyclyl ring, as defined above, is fused with one or more aryl or heteroaryl groups, wherein the point of attachment is on the heterocyclyl ring, and in such instances, the number of ring members continue to designate the number of ring members in the heterocyclyl ring system.
  • a heterocyclyl group may be described as, e.g., a 3-7-membered heterocyclyl, wherein the term “membered” refers to the non-hydrogen ring atoms, i.e., carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, boron, phosphorus, and silicon, within the moiety.
  • Each instance of heterocyclyl may be independently optionally substituted, i.e., unsubstituted (an “unsubstituted heterocyclyl”) or substituted (a “substituted heterocyclyl”) with one or more substituents.
  • the heterocyclyl group is unsubstituted 3-10 membered heterocyclyl.
  • the heterocyclyl group is substituted 3-10 membered heterocyclyl.
  • a heterocyclyl group is a 5-10 membered non-aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, boron, phosphorus, and silicon (“5-10 membered heterocyclyl”).
  • a heterocyclyl group is a 5-8 membered non-aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur (“5-8 membered heterocyclyl”).
  • a heterocyclyl group is a 5-6 membered non-aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur (“5-6 membered heterocyclyl”).
  • the 5-6 membered heterocyclyl has 1-3 ring heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur.
  • the 5-6 membered heterocyclyl has 1-2 ring heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur.
  • the 5-6 membered heterocyclyl has one ring heteroatom selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur.
  • Exemplary 3-membered heterocyclyl groups containing one heteroatom include, without limitation, azirdinyl, oxiranyl, thiorenyl.
  • Exemplary 4-membered heterocyclyl groups containing one heteroatom include, without limitation, azetidinyl, oxetanyl and thietanyl.
  • Exemplary 5- membered heterocyclyl groups containing one heteroatom include, without limitation, tetrahydrofuranyl, dihydrofuranyl, tetrahydrothiophenyl, dihydrothiophenyl, pyrrolidinyl, dihydropyrrolyl and pyrrolyl-2,5-dione.
  • Exemplary 5-membered heterocyclyl groups containing two heteroatoms include, without limitation, dioxolanyl, oxasulfuranyl, disulfuranyl, and oxazolidin-2-one.
  • Exemplary 5-membered heterocyclyl groups containing three heteroatoms include, without limitation, triazolinyl, oxadiazolinyl, and thiadiazolinyl.
  • Exemplary 6-membered heterocyclyl groups containing one heteroatom include, without limitation, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, tetrahydropyranyl, dihydropyridinyl, and thianyl.
  • Exemplary 6-membered heterocyclyl groups containing two heteroatoms include, without limitation, piperazinyl, morpholinyl, dithianyl, dioxanyl.
  • Exemplary 6-membered heterocyclyl groups containing two heteroatoms include, without limitation, triazinanyl or thiomorpholinyl- 1 , 1 -dioxide.
  • Exemplary 7- membered heterocyclyl groups containing one heteroatom include, without limitation, azepanyl, oxepanyl and thiepanyl.
  • Exemplary 8-membered heterocyclyl groups containing one heteroatom include, without limitation, azocanyl, oxecanyl and thiocanyl.
  • Exemplary 5-membered heterocyclyl groups fused to a C 6 aryl ring include, without limitation, indolinyl, isoindolinyl, dihydrobenzofuranyl, dihydrobenzothienyl, benzoxazolinonyl, and the like.
  • Exemplary 6-membered heterocyclyl groups fused to an aryl ring include, without limitation, tetrahydroquinolinyl, tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, and the like.
  • Amin refers to the radical -NR 70 R 71 , wherein R 70 and R 71 are each independently hydrogen, Ci-Cx alkyl, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, C4-C10 heterocyclyl, C6-C10 aryl, and C5-C10 heteroaryl. In some embodiments, amino refers to NEh. As used herein, “cyano” refers to the radical -CN.
  • halo or “halogen,” independently or as part of another substituent, mean, unless otherwise stated, a fluorine (F), chlorine (Cl), bromine (Br), or iodine (I) atom.
  • hydroxy refers to the radical -OH.
  • Alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl groups, as defined herein, are optionally substituted ( e.g ., “substituted” or “unsubstituted” alkyl, “substituted” or “unsubstituted” alkenyl, “substituted” or “unsubstituted” alkynyl, “substituted” or “unsubstituted” heteroalkyl, “substituted” or “unsubstituted” cycloalkyl, “substituted” or “unsubstituted” heterocyclyl, “substituted” or “unsubstituted” aryl or “substituted” or “unsubstituted” heteroaryl group).
  • substituted means that at least one hydrogen present on a group (e.g., a carbon or nitrogen atom) is replaced with a permissible substituent, e.g, a substituent which upon substitution results in a stable compound, e.g, a compound which does not spontaneously undergo transformation such as by rearrangement, cyclization, elimination, or other reaction.
  • a “substituted” group has a substituent at one or more substitutable positions of the group, and when more than one position in any given structure is substituted, the substituent is either the same or different at each position.
  • substituted is contemplated to include substitution with all permissible substituents of organic compounds, such as any of the substituents described herein that result in the formation of a stable compound.
  • the present disclosure contemplates any and all such combinations to arrive at a stable compound.
  • heteroatoms such as nitrogen may have hydrogen substituents and/or any suitable substituent as described herein which satisfy the valencies of the heteroatoms and results in the formation of a stable moiety.
  • Two or more substituents may optionally be joined to form aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, or heterocyclyl groups.
  • Such so-called ring-forming substituents are typically, though not necessarily, found attached to a cyclic base structure.
  • the ring-forming substituents are attached to adjacent members of the base structure.
  • two ring-forming substituents attached to adjacent members of a cyclic base structure create a fused ring structure.
  • the ring-forming substituents are attached to a single member of the base structure.
  • two ring-forming substituents attached to a single member of a cyclic base structure create a spirocyclic structure.
  • the ring-forming substituents are attached to non-adjacent members of the base structure.
  • Compounds of Formula (I) described herein can comprise one or more asymmetric centers, and thus can exist in various isomeric forms, e.g., enantiomers and/or diastereomers.
  • the compounds described herein can be in the form of an individual enantiomer, diastereomer or geometric isomer, or can be in the form of a mixture of stereoisomers, including racemic mixtures and mixtures enriched in one or more stereoisomer.
  • Isomers can be isolated from mixtures by methods known to those skilled in the art, including chiral high-pressure liquid chromatography (HPLC) and the formation and crystallization of chiral salts; or preferred isomers can be prepared by asymmetric syntheses.
  • HPLC high-pressure liquid chromatography
  • a pure enantiomeric compound is substantially free from other enantiomers or stereoisomers of the compound (i.e., in enantiomeric excess).
  • an “S” form of the compound is substantially free from the “R” form of the compound and is, thus, in enantiomeric excess of the “R” form.
  • enantiomerically pure or “pure enantiomer” denotes that the compound comprises more than 75% by weight, more than 80% by weight, more than 85% by weight, more than 90% by weight, more than 91% by weight, more than 92% by weight, more than 93% by weight, more than 94% by weight, more than 95% by weight, more than 96% by weight, more than 97% by weight, more than 98% by weight, more than 99% by weight, more than 99.5% by weight, or more than 99.9% by weight, of the enantiomer.
  • the weights are based upon total weight of all enantiomers or stereoisomers of the compound.
  • Compounds of Formula (I) described herein may also comprise one or more isotopic substitutions.
  • H may be in any isotopic form, including 3 ⁇ 4, 2 H (D or deuterium), and 3 H (T or tritium);
  • C may be in any isotopic form, including 12 C, 13 C, and 14 C;
  • O may be in any isotopic form, including 16 0 and 18 0; and the like.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable salt is meant to include salts of the active compounds that are prepared with relatively nontoxic acids or bases, depending on the particular substituents found on the compounds described herein.
  • base addition salts can be obtained by contacting the neutral form of such compounds with a sufficient amount of the desired base, either neat or in a suitable inert solvent.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable base addition salts include sodium, potassium, calcium, ammonium, organic amino, or magnesium salt, or a similar salt.
  • acid addition salts can be obtained by contacting the neutral form of such compounds with a sufficient amount of the desired acid, either neat or in a suitable inert solvent.
  • Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts include those derived from inorganic acids like hydrochloric, hydrobromic, nitric, carbonic, monohydrogencarbonic, phosphoric, monohydrogenphosphoric, dihydrogenphosphoric, sulfuric, monohydrogensulfuric, hydriodic, or phosphorous acids and the like, as well as the salts derived from organic acids like acetic, propionic, isobutyric, maleic, malonic, benzoic, succinic, suberic, fumaric, lactic, mandelic, phthalic, benzenesulfonic, p-tolylsulfonic, citric, tartaric, methanesulfonic, and the like.
  • inorganic acids like hydrochloric, hydrobromic, nitric, carbonic, monohydrogencarbonic, phosphoric, monohydrogenphosphoric, dihydrogenphosphoric, sulfuric, monohydrogensulfuric, hydriodic, or phosphorous acids and the like,
  • salts of amino acids such as arginate and the like, and salts of organic acids like glucuronic or galacturonic acids and the like (see, e.g., Berge et al, Journal of Pharmaceutical Science 66: 1-19 (1977)).
  • Certain specific compounds used in the devices of the present disclosure e.g., a particle, a hydrogel capsule
  • These salts may be prepared by methods known to those skilled in the art.
  • Other pharmaceutically acceptable carriers known to those of skill in the art are suitable for use in the present disclosure.
  • Devices of the present disclosure may contain a compound of Formula (I) in a prodrug form.
  • Prodrugs are those compounds that readily undergo chemical changes under physiological conditions to provide the compounds useful to mitigate the FBR to devices of the present disclosure. Additionally, prodrugs can be converted to useful compounds of Formula (I) by chemical or biochemical methods in an ex vivo environment.
  • Certain compounds of Formula (I) described herein can exist in unsolvated forms as well as solvated forms, including hydrated forms. In general, the solvated forms are equivalent to unsolvated forms and are encompassed within the scope of the present disclosure. Certain compounds of Formula (I) described herein may exist in multiple crystalline or amorphous forms. In general, all physical forms are equivalent for the uses contemplated by the present disclosure and are intended to be within the scope of the present disclosure.
  • solvate refers to forms of the compound that are associated with a solvent, usually by a solvolysis reaction. This physical association may include hydrogen bonding.
  • Conventional solvents include water, methanol, ethanol, acetic acid, DMSO, THF, diethyl ether, and the like.
  • the compounds described herein may be prepared, e.g ., in crystalline form, and may be solvated. Suitable solvates include pharmaceutically acceptable solvates and further include both stoichiometric solvates and non-stoichiometric solvates.
  • hydrate refers to a compound which is associated with water.
  • the number of the water molecules contained in a hydrate of a compound is in a definite ratio to the number of the compound molecules in the hydrate. Therefore, a hydrate of a compound may be represented, for example, by the general formula R x FhO, wherein R is the compound and wherein x is a number greater than 0.
  • tautomer refers to compounds that are interchangeable forms of a compound structure, and that vary in the displacement of hydrogen atoms and electrons. Thus, two structures may be in equilibrium through the movement of p electrons and an atom (usually H). For example, ends and ketones are tautomers because they are rapidly interconverted by treatment with either acid or base. Tautomeric forms may be relevant to the attainment of the optimal chemical reactivity and biological activity of a compound of interest.
  • connection refers to a connection to an entity, e.g., a polymer (e.g., hydrogel-forming polymer such as alginate) or surface of an implantable element (e.g., a particle, device (e.g., a hydrogel capsule) or material).
  • entity e.g., a polymer (e.g., hydrogel-forming polymer such as alginate) or surface of an implantable element (e.g., a particle, device (e.g., a hydrogel capsule) or material).
  • the connection represented by “ ” may refer to direct attachment to the entity, e.g., a polymer or an implantable element (e.g., a device), or may refer to linkage to the entity through an attachment group.
  • attachment group refers to a moiety for linkage of a compound of Formula (I) to an entity (e.g., a polymer or an implantable element as described herein), and may comprise any attachment chemistry known in the art.
  • entity e.g., a polymer or an implantable element as described herein
  • a listing of exemplary attachment groups is outlined in Bioconjugate Techniques (3 rd ed, Greg T. Hermanson, Waltham, MA: Elsevier, Inc, 2013), which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
  • an attachment group comprises an amine, ketone, ester, amide, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, or thiol.
  • an attachment group is a cross-linker.
  • the attachment group is -C(0)(Ci-C 6 -alkylene)-, wherein alkylene is substituted with R 1 , and R 1 is as described herein.
  • the attachment group is -C(0)(Ci- C 6 -alkylene)-, wherein alkylene is substituted with 1-2 alkyl groups (e.g., 1-2 methyl groups).
  • the attachment group is -C(0)C(CH 3 ) 2 -.
  • the attachment group is -C(0)(methylene)-, wherein alkylene is substituted with 1-2 alkyl groups (e.g., 1-2 methyl groups). In some embodiments, the attachment group is -C(0)CH(CH 3 )-. In some embodiments, the attachment group is -C(0)C(CH 3 )-.
  • the genetically modified cells (e.g., genetically modified human RPE cells) of the present disclosure comprises at least one exogenous transcription unit stably integrated into one or more of four target OCRs in the genome: an OCR on Chr 2, an OCR on Chr 5, an OCR on Chr 8, and an OCR on Chr 12.
  • the 5’ and 3’ boundaries of a target OCR may be defined in relation to: (i) a human reference genome sequence assembly, e.g., the GRCh37 assembly (also known as hgl9) or the GRCh38.pl3 assembly (also known as hg38) in Ensembl, which assemblies are based at the European Molecular Biology Laboratory’s European Bioinformatics Institute (EMBI-EBI) (Cambridge, United Kingdom) (available at the following Ensembl webpages: grch37.ensembl.org and useast.ensembl.org/Homo_sapiens/Info/Index) and / or (ii) the OCR nucleotide sequence recited in SEQ ID NO: 1 (for the Chr 2 OCR), SEQ ID N0:2 (for the Chr 5 OCR), SEQ ID NO:26 (for the Chr 8 OCR) or SEQ ID N0:3 (for the Chr 12 OCR).
  • a human reference genome sequence assembly e.g., the
  • the exogenous transcription unit is inserted in the target genomic OCR(s) of the genetically modified cell anywhere between the two nucleotide positions that define the 5’ and 3’ boundaries of the target OCR(s), e.g., between two nucleotide positions that correspond to the first and last nucleotides of SEQ ID N0:1, SEQ ID N0:2, SEQ ID NO:26, or SEQ ID N0:3.
  • the corresponding nucleotide positions in a target OCR or insertion site are in a nucleotide sequence that shares at least 90% sequence identity with SEQ ID N0:1, SEQ ID N0:2, SEQ ID NO:26 or SEQ ID N0:3.
  • the shared sequence identity of a target OCR in the cell line and the corresponding Chr 2 OCR sequence, Chr 5 OCR sequence, Chr 8 OCR sequence or Chr 12 OCR sequence recited herein is 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99% or greater.
  • These sequences may be used in combination with a targeted genome editing technique to insert the transcription unit into a human cell, e.g., an epithelial cell, at a desired site(s) in the target OCR(s), e.g., on Chr 2, Chr 5, Chr 8 and / or Chr 12.
  • the targeted genome editing technique may be any technique known in the art, e.g., techniques that employ site directed nucleases such as CRISPR-Cas, zinc finger nucleases, transcription activator-like effector nucleases (TALENs), and meganucleases,
  • site directed nucleases such as CRISPR-Cas, zinc finger nucleases, transcription activator-like effector nucleases (TALENs), and meganucleases
  • an insertion site for the transcription unit on Chr 2 is located between two nucleotide positions corresponding to positions xi and yi in SEQ ID NO:l, wherein xi and yi are selected from the group consisting of: 10 and 1200; 25 and 900; 50 and 600; 100 and 300; 200 and 250 and 211 and 218.
  • an insertion site on Chr 2 is located between two nucleotide positions corresponding to positions 100,817,368 and 100,817,374 in the hgl9 sequence for Chr 2.
  • an insertion site for the transcription unit on Chr 5 is located between two nucleotide positions corresponding to positions X2 and yi in SEQ ID NO:2, wherein X2 and yi are selected from the group consisting of: 10 and 1100; 20 and 800; 30 and 500; 40 and 200; 50 and 100; and 59 and 60.
  • an insertion site on Chr 5 is located between two nucleotide positions corresponding to positions 53,853,740 and 53,853,741 in the hgl9 sequence for Chr 5.
  • an insertion site for the transcription unit on Chr 12 is located between two nucleotide positions corresponding to positions X 3 and y 3 in SEQ ID NO:3, wherein X 3 and y 3 are selected from the group consisting of: 50 and 1200; 100 and 1000; 200 and 800; 400 and 600; 500 and 550; and 518 and 525.
  • an insertion site on Chr 5 is located between two nucleotide positions corresponding to positions 122,186,872 and 122,186,877 in the hgl9 sequence for Chr 12.
  • an insertion site for the transcription unit on Chr 8 is located between two nucleotide positions corresponding to positions X 4 and y 4 in SEQ ID NO:26, wherein X 4 and y 4 are selected from the group consisting of: 50 and 950; 150 and 850; 300 and 700; 400 and 600; 425 and 475; and 440 and 445.
  • an insertion site on Chr 8 is located between two nucleotide positions corresponding to positions 30,105,939 and 30,105,944 in the human hg38 reference genome sequence for Chr 8.
  • an exogenous transcription unit is inserted into one, two, three or all four of the target OCRs on Chr 2, Chr 5, Chr 8 and Chr 12 of the genetically modified cell.
  • the transcription unit in each insertion site may encode the same or different substance, e.g., a polypeptide.
  • Two or more transcription units may be inserted in tandem at a single site in a target OCR, and may encode the same or different substances.
  • the promoter in the upstream transcription unit is different than the promoter in the downstream transcription unit.
  • the two transcription units are identical with each other except for the promoter.
  • the promoter sequence in each inserted transcription unit may be for any promoter capable of driving expression of a coding sequence operably linked to the promoter in the genetically modified cell.
  • the promoter sequence consists essentially of, or consists of, SEQ ID NO:4 or a nucleotide sequence that is substantially identical to SEQ ID NO:4, e.g., is at least 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99% or more identical to SEQ ID NO:4.
  • the promoter consists of SEQ ID NO:4.
  • the promoter sequence consists essentially of, or consists of, SEQ ID NO: 5 or a nucleotide sequence that is substantially identical to SEQ ID NO:5, e.g., is at least 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99% or more identical to SEQ ID NO:5. In an embodiment, the promoter consists of SEQ ID NO:5.
  • the genetically modified cell comprises two transcription units inserted in tandem in at least one of the target OCRs described herein.
  • the promoter sequence in the upstream transcription unit comprises SEQ ID NO:4 or a nucleotide sequence that is substantially identical to SEQ ID NO:4, e.g., is at least 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99% or more identical to SEQ ID NO:4.
  • the promoter sequence in the upstream transcription unit comprises SEQ ID NO:5 or a nucleotide sequence that is substantially identical to SEQ ID NO:5, e.g., is at least 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99% or more identical to SEQ ID NO:5.
  • the promoter sequences recited in the previous sentence are reversed, such that the upstream transcription unit comprises SEQ ID NO:5 or the substantially similar nucleotide sequence and the downstream transcription unit comprises SEQ ID NO:5 or the substantially similar nucleotide sequence.
  • the coding sequence in each inserted transcription unit may be operably linked to a polyA signal sequence, which sequence may be the same or different in each transcription unit.
  • the polyA signal sequence consists essentially of, or consists of, SEQ ID NO:6 or a nucleotide sequence that is substantially identical to SEQ ID NO:6, e.g., is at least 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99% or more identical to SEQ ID NO:6.
  • the polyA signal sequence consists of SEQ ID NO:6.
  • the exogenous transcription unit encodes a therapeutic polypeptide (e.g., a protein), such as a clotting factor, growth factor, hormone, enzyme, cytokine (e.g., a pro- inflammatory cytokine or an anti-inflammatory cytokine), cytokine receptor, chimeric protein, fusion protein or lipoprotein.
  • a therapeutic polypeptide e.g., a protein
  • cytokine e.g., a pro- inflammatory cytokine or an anti-inflammatory cytokine
  • cytokine receptor e.g., a pro- inflammatory cytokine or an anti-inflammatory cytokine
  • chimeric protein fusion protein or lipoprotein
  • the polypeptide encoded by the exogenous transcription unit may have a naturally occurring amino acid sequence or may contain a variant of the naturally occurring sequence.
  • the variant can be a non-naturally occurring or naturally occurring amino acid substitution, mutation, deletion or addition relative to the reference (e.g., naturally
  • the naturally occurring amino acid sequence can be a human or a non-human amino acid sequence.
  • the naturally occurring amino acid sequence is a human sequence.
  • the therapeutic polypeptide has about 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, or less than 50 amino acids.
  • the polypeptide has an average molecular weight of 5 kD, 10 kD, 25 kD, 50 kD, 100 kD, 150 kD, 200 kD, 250 kD, 500 kD, or more.
  • the polypeptide is a hormone.
  • hormones include anti diuretic hormone (ADH), oxytocin, growth hormone (GH), prolactin, growth hormone-releasing hormone (GHRH), thyroid stimulating hormone (TSH), thyrotropin-release hormone (TRH), adrenocorticotropic hormone (ACTH), follicle-stimulating hormone (FSH), luteinizing hormone (LH), luteinizing hormone-releasing hormone (LHRH), thyroxine, calcitonin, parathyroid hormone (PTH), aldosterone, cortisol, epinephrine, glucagon, insulin, estrogen, progesterone, and testosterone.
  • ADH anti diuretic hormone
  • GH growth hormone
  • prolactin growth hormone-releasing hormone
  • TSH thyroid stimulating hormone
  • TRH thyrotropin-release hormone
  • ACTH adrenocorticotropic hormone
  • FSH follicle-stimulating hormone
  • LH lute
  • the polypeptide is insulin (e.g., insulin A-chain, insulin B- chain, or proinsulin).
  • the polypeptide is a growth hormone, such as human growth hormone (hGH), recombinant human growth hormone (rhGH), bovine growth hormone, methionine-human growth hormone, des-phenylalanine human growth hormone, and porcine growth hormone.
  • the polypeptide is a growth factor, e.g., vascular endothelial growth factor (VEGF), nerve growth factor (NGF), platelet-derived growth factor (PDGF), fibroblast growth factor (FGF), epidermal growth factor (EGF), transforming growth factor (TGF), and insulin-like growth factor-I and -II (IGF-I and IGF-II).
  • VEGF vascular endothelial growth factor
  • NEF nerve growth factor
  • PDGF platelet-derived growth factor
  • FGF fibroblast growth factor
  • EGF epidermal growth factor
  • TGF transforming growth factor
  • IGF-I and IGF-II insulin-like growth factor-I and -II
  • the polypeptide is a clotting factor or a coagulation factor, e.g., a blood clotting factor or a blood coagulation factor.
  • the polypeptide is involved in coagulation, i.e., the process by which blood is converted from a liquid to solid or gel.
  • Exemplary clotting factors and coagulation factors include Factor I (e.g., fibrinogen), Factor II (e.g., prothrombin), Factor III (e.g., tissue factor), Factor V (e.g., proaccelerin, labile factor), Factor VI, Factor VII (e.g., stable factor, proconvertin), Factor VIII (e.g., antihemophilic factor A), Factor VIIIC, Factor IX (e.g., antihemophilic factor B), Factor X (e.g., Stuart-Prower factor), Factor XI (e.g., plasma thromboplastin antecedent), Factor XII (e.g., Hagerman factor), Factor XIII (e.g., fibrin-stabilizing factor), von Willebrand factor (vWF), prekallikrein, heparin cofactor II, high molecular weight kininogen (e.g., Fitzgerald factor), antithrombin III, and fibronect
  • the polypeptide is an immunoglobulin chain (heavy or light chain) or fragment thereof, comprising at least one immunoglobulin variable domain sequence, and optionally comprising an immunoglobulin Fc region. In an embodiment, the polypeptide a full- length immunoglobulin chain.
  • the polypeptide is a cytokine or a cytokine receptor, or a chimeric protein including cytokines or their receptors, including, for example tumor necrosis factor alpha and beta, their receptors and their derivatives, renin; lipoproteins; colchicine; corticotrophin; vasopressin; somatostatin; lypressin; pancreozymin; leuprolide; alpha- 1 -antitrypsin; atrial natriuretic factor; lung surfactant; a plasminogen activator other than a tissue-type plasminogen activator (t-PA), for example a urokinase; bombesin; thrombin; enkephalinase; RANTES (regulated on activation normally T-cell expressed and secreted); human macrophage inflammatory protein (MIP-1 -alpha); a serum albumin such as human serum albumin; mullerian- inhibiting substance; relaxin A-chain;
  • CSFs colony stimulating factors
  • ILs interleukins
  • T-cell receptors surface membrane proteins
  • ILs interleukins
  • T-cell receptors surface membrane proteins
  • decay accelerating factor transport proteins
  • homing receptors addressins
  • fertility inhibitors such as the prostaglandins
  • fertility promoters regulatory proteins
  • antibodies including fragments thereof and chimeric proteins, such as immunoadhesins.
  • Suitable polypeptides may be native or recombinant and include, e.g., fusion proteins.
  • Examples of a polypeptide that may be encoded by the exogenous transcription unit also include CCL1, CCL2 (MCP-1), CCL3 (MPMa), CCL4 (MPMb), CCL5 (RANTES), CCL6, CCL7, CCL8, CCL9 (CCL10), CCL11, CCL12, CCL13, CCL14, CCL15, CCL16, CCL17, CCL18, CCL19, CCL20, CCL21, CCL22, CCL23, CCL24, CCL25, CCL26, CCL27, CCL28, CXCL1 (KC), CXCL2 (SDFla), CXCL3, CXCL4, CXCL5, CXCL6, CXCL7, CXCL8 (IL8), CXCL9, CXCL10, CXCL11, CXCL12, CXCL13, CXCL14, CXCL15, CXCL16, CXCL17, CX3CL1, XCL1, XCL2, TNFA, TN
  • the polypeptide is a replacement therapy or a replacement protein.
  • the replacement therapy or replacement protein is a clotting factor or a coagulation factor, e.g., Factor VII, Factor VIII (e.g., comprises a naturally occurring human Factor VIII amino acid sequence or a variant thereof) or Factor IX (e.g., comprises a naturally occurring human Factor IX amino acid sequence or a variant thereof).
  • the transcription unit encodes a FVII protein, e.g., a human FVII protein, e.g., comprises, consists essentially of, or consists of SEQ ID NO: 18.
  • the transcription unit encodes a Factor VIII protein, e.g., a human Factor VIII protein.
  • the Factor VIII protein is a B -domain-deleted Factor VIII protein (FVIII-BDD).
  • the FVIII-BDD protein comprises, consists essentially of, or consists of SEQ ID NO:8.
  • the transcription unit encodes a Factor IX protein, e.g., a human Factor IX (FIX) protein.
  • FIX protein is a FIX-padua protein and comprises, consists essentially of, or consists of SEQ ID NO: 16.
  • the replacement therapy or replacement protein is an enzyme, e.g., alpha-galactosidase A (GLA), alpha-L-iduronidase (IDUA), glucocerebrosidase, or N- sulfoglucosamine sulfohydrolase (SGSH).
  • the genetically modified cells have one or more of the following characteristics: (i) are not capable of producing insulin (e.g., insulin A-chain, insulin B-chain, or proinsulin) in an amount effective to treat diabetes or another disease or condition that may be treated with insulin; (ii) not capable of producing insulin in a glucose-responsive manner; or (iii) not derived from an induced pluripotent stem cell that was engineered or differentiated into insulin- producing pancreatic beta cells.
  • insulin e.g., insulin A-chain, insulin B-chain, or proinsulin
  • a genetically modified cell described herein e.g., a genetically modified RPE cell, or a plurality of such cells may be incorporated into, e.g., encapsulated within, an implantable device for use in providing a polypeptide encoded by the inserted transcription unit to a subject.
  • Exemplary implantable devices comprise materials such as metals, metallic alloys, ceramics, polymers, fibers, inert materials, and combinations thereof.
  • the device can have any configuration and shape appropriate for supporting the viability and productivity of the encapsulated cells after implant into the intended target location.
  • the device is a hydrogel capsule, e.g., a millicapsule or a microcapsule (e.g., a hydrogel millicapsule or a hydrogel microcapsule).
  • the device e.g., capsule, particle
  • exogenous agents may include, e.g., a nucleic acid (e.g., an RNA or DNA molecule), a protein (e.g., a hormone, an enzyme (e.g., glucose oxidase, kinase, phosphatase, oxygenase, hydrogenase, reductase), an antibody, an antibody fragment, an antigen, a small molecule, a lipid, a drug, vaccine, or any derivative thereof, a small-molecule, an active or inactive fragment of a protein or polypeptide.
  • the device comprises at least one means for mitigating the foreign body response (FBR), for example, mitigate the FBR when the device is implanted into or onto a subject.
  • FBR foreign body response
  • a device described herein may be provided as a preparation or composition for implantation or administration to a subject, i.e., a device preparation or device composition.
  • a device preparation or device composition comprises at least 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 or more devices, and at least 20%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95% or 100% of the devices in the preparation or composition have a characteristic as described herein, e.g., mean capsule diameter, or number of cells in the cell- containing compartment.
  • a device, device preparation or device composition may be configured for implantation, or is implanted or disposed, into or onto any site or part of the body.
  • the implantable device or device preparation is configured for implantation into the peritoneal cavity (e.g., the lesser sac, also known as the omental bursa or bursalis omentum).
  • a device, device preparation or device composition may be implanted in the peritoneal cavity (e.g., the omentum, e.g., the lesser sac) or disposed on a surface within the peritoneal cavity (e.g., omentum, e.g., lesser sac) via injection or catheter. Additional considerations for implantation or disposition of a device, device preparation or device composition into the omentum (e.g., the lesser sac) are provided in M. Pellicciaro et al. (2017) CellR4 5(3): e2410.
  • the implantable device comprises at least one cell-containing compartment comprising a plurality of live genetically modified cells encapsulated by a polymer composition.
  • the device contains two, three, four or more cell -containing compartments, each of which comprises a plurality of live, engineered cells described herein.
  • the cells in at least one of the compartments are capable of expressing and secreting GLA or a blood clotting factor, e.g., an FVIII protein, when the device is implanted into a subject.
  • the polymer composition in the cell-containing compartment(s) comprises a polysaccharide or other hydrogel-forming polymer (e.g., alginate, hyaluronate or chondroitin).
  • a polysaccharide or other hydrogel-forming polymer e.g., alginate, hyaluronate or chondroitin.
  • the polymer is an alginate, which is a polysaccharide made up of b-D-mannuronic acid (M) and a-L-guluronic acid (G).
  • the alginate has a low molecular weight (e.g., approximate molecular weight of ⁇ 75 kD) and G:M ratio > 1.5, ii) a medium molecular weight alginate, e.g., has approximate molecular weight of 75-150 kDa and G:M ratio > 1.5, (ill) a high molecular weight alginate, e.g., has an approximate MW of 150 kDa - 250 kDa and G:M ratio > 1.5, (iv) or a blend of two or more of these alginates.
  • a low molecular weight e.g., approximate molecular weight of ⁇ 75 kD
  • G:M ratio > 1.5 e.g., a medium molecular weight alginate, e.g., has approximate molecular weight of 75-150 kDa and G:M ratio > 1.5
  • a high molecular weight alginate e.g., has an approximate MW of 150 kDa
  • the cell-containing compartment(s) further comprises at least one cell-binding substance (CBS), e.g., a cell-binding peptide (CBP) or cell-binding polypeptide (CBPP).
  • CBS cell-binding substance
  • the CBS comprises a CBP covalently attached to polymer molecules in the polymer composition via a linker (“CBP-polymer”).
  • the polymer in the CBP-polymer is a polysaccharide (e.g., an alginate) or other hydrogel -forming polymer.
  • the cell -binding peptide is 25 amino acids or less (e.g., 20, 15, 10 or less) in length and comprises the cell binding sequence of a ligand for a cell-adhesion molecule (CAM).
  • the cell-binding peptide consists essentially of a cell binding sequence shown in Table 1 herein.
  • the cell binding sequence is RGD or RGDSP.
  • the amino terminus of the cell-binding peptide is covalently attached to the polymer via an amino acid linker.
  • the amino acid linker consists essentially of one to three glycine residues.
  • the cell-binding peptide consists essentially of RGD or RGDSP and the linker consists essentially of a single glycine residue.
  • the device further comprises at least one means for mitigating the foreign body response (FBR), for example, mitigate the FBR when the device is implanted into or onto a subject.
  • FBR foreign body response
  • Various means for mitigating the FBR of the devices are described herein, but any biological, chemical or physical element that is capable of reducing the FBR to the device compared to a reference device is contemplated herein.
  • the means for mitigating the FBR in devices disclosed herein can comprise surrounding the cells with a semi-permeable biocompatible membrane having a pore size that is selected to allow oxygen and other molecules important to cell survival and function to move through the semi-permeable membrane while preventing immune cells from traversing through the pores.
  • the semi-permeable membrane has a molecular weight cutoff of less than 1000 kD or between 50-700 kD, 70-300 kD, or between 70-150 kD, or between 70 and 130 kD.
  • Another FBR-mitigating means comprises completely surrounding the cell -containing compartment with a barrier compartment formed from a cell-free biocompatible material, such as the two or three layer capsules described in WO 2014/153127, WO 2016/019391 or the core-shell microcapsules described in Ma, M et ak, Adv. Healthc Mater., 2(5):667-672 (2012).
  • a barrier compartment could be used with or without the semi-permeable membrane means.
  • FBR-mitigating means can comprise disposing on or within the device an anti-inflammatory drug that is released from the implanted device to inhibit FBR, e.g., as described in US Patent No. 9,867,781.
  • FBR-mitigating means employ a CSF-1R inhibitor that is disposed on the device surface or encapsulated within the device, as described in WO 2017/176792 and WO 2017/176804.
  • Other FBR-mitigating means employ configuring the device in a spherical shape with a diameter of greater than 1 mm, as described in Veiseh, O., et al., Nature Materials 14:643-652 (2015).
  • the means for mitigating the FBR comprises disposing an afibrotic compound on the exterior surface of the device and / or within a barrier compartment surrounding the cell-containing compartment.
  • exemplary afibrotic compounds include compounds of Formula (I) described herein below.
  • the device can comprise combinations of two or more of the above FBR-mitigating means.
  • the device has two hydrogel compartments, in which the inner, cell- containing compartment is completely surrounded by the second, outer (e.g., barrier) compartment.
  • the inner boundary of the second compartment forms an interface with the outer boundary of the first compartment, e.g., as illustrated in FIG. 7.
  • one or more compartments in a device comprises an afibrotic polymer, e.g., an afibrotic compound of Formula (I) (defined herein below) covalently attached to a polymer that is the same or different than the polymer in the CBP-polymer.
  • an afibrotic polymer e.g., an afibrotic compound of Formula (I) (defined herein below) covalently attached to a polymer that is the same or different than the polymer in the CBP-polymer.
  • some or all the monomers in the afibrotic polymer are modified with the same compound of Formula (I).
  • some or all the monomers in the afibrotic polymer are modified with different compounds of Formula (I).
  • the afibrotic polymer is present only in the outer, barrier compartment, including its outer surface.
  • One or more compartments in a device may comprise an unmodified polymer that is the same or different than the polymer in the CBP-polymer and in any afibrotic polymer that is present in the device.
  • the first compartment, second compartment or all compartments in the device comprises the unmodified polymer.
  • the unmodified polymer is an unmodified alginate.
  • the unmodified alginate has a molecular weight of 150 kDa - 250 kDa and a G:M ratio of > 1 5
  • L 2 is a bond
  • M is absent, alkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, each of which is optionally substituted by one or more R 3 ;
  • P is absent, cycloalkyl, heterocycyl, or heteroaryl, each of which is optionally substituted by one or more R 4 ;
  • Z is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, -OR A , -C(0)R A , -C(0)0R A , -C(0)N(R C )(R d ), -N(R C )C(0)R a , cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is optionally substituted by one or more R 5 ; each R a , R b , R c , R d , R e , R f , and R° is independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, halogen, azido, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl,
  • each R A1 , R b1 , R C1 , R d1 , R e1 , and R F1 is independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl is optionally substituted by one or more R 7 ; each R 7 is independently alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl is optionally substituted by one or more R 7 ; each R 7 is independently alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl is optionally substituted by one or more R 7 ; each R 7 is independently alky
  • the compound of Formula (I) is a compound of Formula (I-a): or a salt thereof, wherein:
  • L 2 is a bond
  • M is absent, alkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, each of which is optionally substituted by one or more R 3 ;
  • P is heteroaryl optionally substituted by one or more R 4 ;
  • Z is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, each of which is optionally substituted by one or more R 5 ; each R a , R b , R c , R d , R e , R f , and R° is independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, halogen, azido, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is optionally substituted with one or more R 6 ; or R c and R°, taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, form a ring (e.g., a 5-7 membered ring), optionally substituted with one or more R 6
  • each R A1 , R b1 , R C1 , R d1 , R e1 , and R F1 is independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl is optionally substituted by one or more R 7 ; each R 7 is independently alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl is optionally substituted by one or more R 7 ; each R 7 is independently alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl is optionally substituted by one or more R 7 ; each R 7 is independently alky
  • A is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, -0-, -C(0)0-, -C(O)-, -OC(O) -, -N(R c )C(0)-, -N(R c )C(0)(Ci-C 6 -alkylene)-, -N(R c )C(0)(C 2 -C 6 -alkenylene)-, or -N(R C )-.
  • A is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, -0-, — C(0)0— , — C(O)— , -OC(O) -, or -N(R C )-.
  • A is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, -0-, -C(0)0-, -C(0)-,-0C(0) -, or -N(R C )-.
  • A is alkyl, -0-, -C(0)0-, -C(0)-, -0C(0), or -N(R C )-. In some embodiments, A is -N(R c )C(0)-, -N(R c )C(0)(Ci-C 6 -alkylene)-, or -N(R c )C(0)(Ci-C 6 -alkenylene)-. In some embodiments, A is -N(R C )-. In some embodiments, A is -N(R C ) -, and R c an R u is independently hydrogen or alkyl. In some embodiments, A is -NH-.
  • A is -N(R c )C(0)(Ci-C 6 -alkylene)-, wherein alkylene is substituted with R 1 .
  • A is -N(R c )C(0)(Ci-C 6 -alkylene)- , and R 1 is alkyl (e.g., methyl).
  • A is -NHC(0)C(CH 3 ) 2 -.
  • A is -N(R c )C(0)(methylene)-, andR 1 is alkyl (e.g., methyl).
  • A is -NHC(0)CH(CH 3 )-.
  • A is -NHC(0)C(CH 3 )-.
  • L 1 is a bond, alkyl, or heteroalkyl. In some embodiments, L 1 is a bond or alkyl. In some embodiments, L 1 is a bond. In some embodiments, L 1 is alkyl. In some embodiments, L 1 is C1-C6 alkyl. In some embodiments, L 1 is — CH 2— , -CH(CH 3 )-, -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 , or -CH 2 CH 2- In some embodiments, L 1 is -CH 2- or
  • L 3 is a bond, alkyl, or heteroalkyl. In some embodiments, L 3 is a bond. In some embodiments, L 3 is alkyl. In some embodiments, L 3 is Ci- Ci2 alkyl. In some embodiments, L 3 is C1-C6 alkyl. In some embodiments, L 3 is -CH 2- In some embodiments, L 3 is heteroalkyl. In some embodiments, L 3 is Ci-Ci 2 heteroalkyl, optionally substituted with one or more R 2 (e.g., oxo).
  • L 3 is C1-C6 heteroalkyl, optionally substituted with one or more R 2 (e.g., oxo). In some embodiments, L 3 is -C(0)0CH 2- -CH 2 (0CH 2 CH 2 ) 2- , -CH 2 (0CH 2 CH 2 ) -, CH 2 CH 2 0-, or -CH 2 0-. In some embodiments, L 3 is -CH 2 0-.
  • M is absent, alkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl. In some embodiments, M is heteroalkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl. In some embodiments, M is absent. In some embodiments, M is alkyl (e.g., C1-C6 alkyl). In some embodiments, M is -CH 2- . In some embodiments, M is heteroalkyl (e.g., C1-C6 heteroalkyl). In some embodiments, M is (- OCH 2 CH 2 -)Z, wherein z is an integer selected from 1 to 10. In some embodiments, z is an integer selected from 1 to 5.
  • M is -OCH 2 CH 2- , (-OCH 2 CH 2- ) 2 , (-OCH 2 CH 2- ) , (-0CH 2 CH 2- ) 4 , or (-OCH 2 CH 2- ) 5 .
  • M is -OCH 2 CH 2- , (- OCH 2 CH 2- ) 2 , (-OCH 2 CH 2- ) , or (-OCH 2 CH 2- ) 4 .
  • M is (-OCH 2 CH 2- ) .
  • M is aryl.
  • M is phenyl.
  • M is unsubstituted phenyl.
  • M is doctor some embodiments, M is phenyl substituted with R (e.g., 1 R ).
  • M is .
  • R 7 is CF 3 .
  • P is absent, heterocyclyl, or heteroaryl. In some embodiments, P is absent. In some embodiments, for Formulas (I) and (I-a), P is a tricyclic, bicyclic, or monocyclic heteroaryl. In some embodiments, P is a monocyclic heteroaryl. In some embodiments, P is a nitrogen-containing heteroaryl. In some embodiments, P is a monocyclic, nitrogen-containing heteroaryl. In some embodiments, P is a 5-membered heteroaryl. In some embodiments, P is a 5-membered nitrogen-containing heteroaryl.
  • P is tetrazolyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, or triazolyl, pyrrolyl, oxazolyl, or thiazolyl. In some embodiments, P is tetrazolyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, or triazolyl, or pyrrolyl. In some embodiments,
  • P is imidazolyl. In some embodiments, P is . In some embodiments, P is triazolyl. In some embodiments, P is 1,2,3-triazolyl. In some embodiments, P is
  • P is heterocyclyl. In some embodiments, P is a 5-membered heterocyclyl or a 6-membered heterocyclyl. In some embodiments, P is imidazolidinonyl. In
  • P is .
  • P is thiomorpholinyl-l,l-dioxidyl.
  • Z is alkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl.
  • Z is heterocyclyl.
  • Z is monocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclyl.
  • Z is an oxygen-containing heterocyclyl.
  • Z is a 4-membered heterocyclyl, 5-membered heterocyclyl, or 6-membered heterocyclyl.
  • Z is a 6-membered heterocyclyl.
  • Z is a 6-membered oxygen-containing heterocyclyl.
  • Z is tetrahydropyranyl.
  • Z is a 4-membered oxygen-containing heterocyclyl.
  • Z is
  • Z is a bicyclic oxygen-containing heterocyclyl. In some embodiments, Z is phthalic anhydridyl. In some embodiments, Z is a sulfur-containing heterocyclyl. In some embodiments, Z is a 6-membered sulfur-containing heterocyclyl. n some embodiments, Z is a 6-membered heterocyclyl containing a nitrogen atom and a sulfur atom. In some embodiments, Z is thiomorpholinyl-1, 1-dioxidyl. In some embodiments, some embodiments, Z is a nitrogen-containing heterocyclyl. In some embodiments, Z is a 6-
  • Z is a bicyclic heterocyclyl. In some embodiments, Z is a bicyclic nitrogen-containing heterocyclyl, optionally substituted with one or more R 5 . In some embodiments, Z is 2-oxa-7-azaspiro[3.5]nonanyl. In some embodiments, some embodiments, Z is l-oxa-3,8-diazaspiro[4.5]decan-2-one. In some embodiments,
  • Z is aryl. In some embodiments, Z is monocyclic aryl. In some embodiments, Z is phenyl. In some embodiments, Z is monosub stituted phenyl (e.g., with 1 R 5 ). In some embodiments, Z is monosubstituted phenyl, wherein the 1 R 5 is a nitrogen-containing group. In some embodiments, Z is monosubstituted phenyl, wherein the 1 R 5 is NFh. In some embodiments, Z is monosubstituted phenyl, wherein the 1 R 5 is an oxygen- containing group.
  • Z is monosubstituted phenyl, wherein the 1 R 5 is an oxygen-containing heteroalkyl. In some embodiments, Z is monosubstituted phenyl, wherein the 1 R 5 is OCH3. In some embodiments, Z is monosubstituted phenyl, wherein the 1 R 5 is in the ortho position. In some embodiments, Z is monosubstituted phenyl, wherein the 1 R 5 is in the meta position. In some embodiments, Z is monosubstituted phenyl, wherein the 1 R 5 is in the para position.
  • Z is alkyl. In some embodiments, Z is Ci- C12 alkyl. In some embodiments, Z is C1-C10 alkyl. In some embodiments, Z is Ci-Cs alkyl. In some embodiments, Z is Ci-Cs alkyl substituted with 1-5 R 5 . In some embodiments, Z is Ci-Cs alkyl substituted with 1 R 5 .
  • Z is Ci-Cs alkyl substituted with 1 R 5 , wherein R 5 is alkyl, heteroalkyl, halogen, oxo, -OR A1 , -C(0)0R A1 , -C(0)R B1 ,-0C(0)R B1 , or - N(R C1 )(R D1 ).
  • Z is Ci-Cx alkyl substituted with 1 R 5 , wherein R 5 is -OR A1 or -C(0)0R A1 .
  • Z is Ci-Cx alkyl substituted with 1 R 5 , wherein R 5 is - OR A1 or -C(0)0H.
  • Z is -CH3.
  • Z is heteroalkyl.
  • Z is C1-C12 heteroalkyl.
  • Z is C1-C10 heteroalkyl.
  • Z is C1-C8 heteroalkyl.
  • Z is C1-C6 heteroalkyl.
  • Z is a nitrogen-containing heteroalkyl optionally substituted with one or more R 5 .
  • Z is a nitrogen and sulfur-containing heteroalkyl substituted with 1-5 R 5 .
  • Z is N-methyl-2-(methylsulfonyl)ethan-l -aminyl.
  • Z is -OR A or -C(0)0R A . In some embodiments, Z is -OR A (e.g., - OH or -OCH3). In some embodiments, Z is -OCH3. In some embodiments, Z is -C(0)0R A (e.g., -C(O)OH).
  • Z is hydrogen
  • L 2 is a bond and P and L 3 are independently absent.
  • L 2 is a bond
  • P is heteroaryl
  • L 3 is a bond
  • Z is hydrogen
  • P is heteroaryl
  • L 3 is heteroalkyl
  • Z is alkyl.
  • the compound of Formula (I) is a compound of Formula (I-b): or a salt thereof, wherein Ring M 1 is cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, each of which is optionally substituted with 1-5 R 3 ; Ring Z 1 is cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl or heteroaryl, optionally substituted with 1-5 R 5 ; each of R 2a , R 2b , R 2c , and R 2d is independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, halo, cyano, nitro, amino, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, or each of R 2a and R 2b or R 2c and R 2d is taken together to form an oxo group; X is absent, N(R 10 ), O, or S; R c is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroal
  • each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl is optionally and independently substituted with halogen, oxo, cyano, cycloalkyl, or heterocyclyl.
  • the compound of Formula (I-b) is a compound of Formula (I-b-i): or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein Ring M 2 is aryl or heteroaryl optionally substituted with one or more R 3 ; Ring Z 2 is cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl; each of R 2a , R 2b , R 2c , and R 2d is independently hydrogen, alkyl, or heteroalkyl, or each of R 2a and R 2b or R 2C and R 2d is taken together to form an oxo group; X is absent, O, or S; each R 3 and R 5 is independently alkyl, heteroalkyl, halogen, oxo, -OR A1 , -C(0)0R A1 , or -C(0)R , wherein each alkyl and heteroalkyl is optionally substituted with halogen; or two R 5 are taken together to form a 5-6 membered ring fused to
  • the compound of Formula (I-b-i) is a compound of Formula (I-b- ii): or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein Ring Z 2 is cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl or heteroaryl; each of R 2c and R 2d is independently hydrogen, alkyl, or heteroalkyl, or R 2c and R 2d and taken together to form an oxo group; each R 3 and R 5 is independently alkyl, heteroalkyl, halogen, oxo, -OR A1 , -C(0)0R A1 , or -C(0)R , wherein each alkyl and heteroalkyl is optionally substituted with halogen; each R A1 and R B1 is independently hydrogen, alkyl, or heteroalkyl; each of p and q is independently 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6; and “ refers to a connection to an attachment group or a polymer described herein.
  • the compound of Formula (I) is a compound of Formula (I-c): or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein Ring Z 2 is cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl or heteroaryl; each of R 2c and R 2d is independently hydrogen, alkyl, or heteroalkyl, or R 2c and R 2d is taken together to form an oxo group; each R 3 and R 5 is independently alkyl, heteroalkyl, halogen, oxo, -OR A1 , -C(0)0R a1 , or -C(0)R , wherein each alkyl and heteroalkyl is optionally substituted with halogen; each R A1 and R B1 is independently hydrogen, alkyl, or heteroalkyl; m is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6; each of p and q is independently 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6; and refers to a connection to an attachment group or a polymer described herein.
  • Ring Z 2 is cycloalkyl,
  • the compound of Formula (I) is a compound of Formula (I-d): or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein Ring Z 2 is cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl or heteroaryl; X is absent, O, or S; each of R 2a , R 2b , R 2c , and R 2d is independently hydrogen, alkyl, or heteroalkyl, or each of R 2a and R 2b or R 2c and R 2d is taken together to form an oxo group; each R 5 is independently alkyl, heteroalkyl, halogen, oxo, -OR A1 , -C(0)0R A1 , or-C(0)R B1 , wherein each alkyl and heteroalkyl is optionally substituted with halogen; each R A1 and R B1 is independently hydrogen, alkyl, or heteroalkyl; each of m and n is independently 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6; p is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6;
  • the compound of Formula (I) is a compound of Formula (I-e): or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein Ring Z 2 is cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl or heteroaryl; X is absent, O, or S; each of R 2a , R 2b , R 2c , and R 2d is independently hydrogen, alkyl, or heteroalkyl, or each of R 2a and R 2b or R 2c and R 2d is taken together to form an oxo group; each R 5 is independently alkyl, heteroalkyl, halogen, oxo, -OR A1 , -C(0)0R A1 , or -C(0)R ; each R A1 and R B1 is independently hydrogen, alkyl, or heteroalkyl; each of m and n is independently 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6; p is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6; and refers to a connection to an attachment group or a polymer described herein.
  • Ring Z 2 is
  • the compound of Formula (I) is a compound of Formula (I-f): or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein M is alkyl optionally substituted with one or more R 3 ; Ring P is heteroaryl optionally substituted with one or more R 4 ; L 3 is alkyl or heteroalkyl optionally substituted with one or more R 2 ; Z is alkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, each of which is optionally substituted with one or more R 5 ; each of R 2a and R 2b is independently hydrogen, alkyl, or heteroalkyl, or R 2a and R 2b is taken together to form an oxo group; each R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , and R 5 is independently alkyl, heteroalkyl, halogen, oxo, - OR A1 , -C(0)0R a1 , or -C(0)R B1 ; each R A1 and R B
  • the compound of Formula (I) is a compound of Formula (II): or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein M is a bond, alkyl or aryl, wherein alkyl and aryl is optionally substituted with one or more R 3 ; L 3 is alkyl or heteroalkyl optionally substituted with one or more R 2 ; Z is hydrogen, alkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl or -OR A , wherein alkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is optionally substituted with one or more R 5 ; R A is hydrogen; each of R 2a and R 2b is independently hydrogen, alkyl, or heteroalkyl, or R 2a and R 2b is taken together to form an oxo group; each R 2 , R 3 , and R 5 is independently alkyl, heteroalkyl, halogen, oxo
  • the compound of Formula (II) is a compound of Formula (Il-a): (Il-a), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein L 3 is alkyl or heteroalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted with one or more R 2 ; Z is hydrogen, alkyl, heteroalkyl, or -OR A , wherein alkyl and heteroalkyl are optionally substituted with one or more R 5 ; each of R 2a and R 2b is independently hydrogen, alkyl, or heteroalkyl, or R 2a and R 2b is taken together to form an oxo group; each R 2 , R 3 , and R 5 is independently alkyl, heteroalkyl, halogen, oxo, -OR A1 , -C(0)0R A1 , or-C(0)R B1 ; R A is hydrogen; each R A1 and R is independently hydrogen, alkyl, or heteroalkyl; n is independently 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6; and “
  • the compound of Formula (I) is a compound of Formula (III): (HI), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein Z 1 is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, each of which is optionally substituted with 1-5 R 5 ; each of R 2a , R 2b , R 2c , and R 2d is independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, halo, cyano, nitro, amino, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl; or R 2a and R 2b or R 2c and R 2d are taken together to form an oxo group; R c is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, or heteroalkyl, wherein each of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, or heteroalkyl is optional
  • each R A1 and R B1 is independently hydrogen, alkyl, or heteroalkyl; m and n are each independently 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6; q is an integer from 0 to 25; and “ ⁇ " ⁇ ” refers to a connection to an attachment group or a polymer described herein.
  • the compound of Formula (III) is a compound of Formula (Ill-a): (Ill-a), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein Ring Z 2 is cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, each of which is optionally substituted with 1-5 R 5 ; each of R 2a , R 2b , R 2c , and R 2d is independently hydrogen, alkyl, heteroalkyl, halo; or R 2a and R 2b or R 2c and R 2d are taken together to form an oxo group; each of R 3 and R 5 is independently alkyl, heteroalkyl, halogen, oxo, -OR A1 , -C(0)0R A1 , or -C(0)R B1 ; each R A1 and R B1 is independently hydrogen, alkyl, or heteroalkyl; m and n are each independently 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6; o and p are each independently 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5
  • the compound of Formula (Ill-a) is a compound of Formula (Ill-b): (Ill-b), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein Ring Z 2 is cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, each of which is optionally substituted with 1-5 R 5 ; each of R 2a , R 2b , R 2c , and R 2d is independently hydrogen, alkyl, heteroalkyl, halo; or R 2a and R 2b or R 2c and R 2d are taken together to form an oxo group; each of R 3 and R 5 is independently alkyl, heteroalkyl, halogen, oxo, -OR A1 , -C(0)0R A1 , or -C(0)R B1 ; each R A1 and R B1 is independently hydrogen, alkyl, or heteroalkyl; m and n are each independently 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6; o and p are each independently 0, 1, 2, 3,
  • the compound of Formula (Ill-a) is a compound of Formula (III-c): or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein X is C(R’)(R”), N(R’), or S(0) x ; each of R’ and R” is independently hydrogen, alkyl, halogen, or cycloalkyl; each of R 2a , R 2b , R 2c , and R 2d is independently hydrogen, alkyl, heteroalkyl, or halo; or R 2a and R 2b or R 2c and R 2d are taken together to form an oxo group; each of R 3 and R 5 is independently alkyl, heteroalkyl, halogen, oxo, -OR A1 , -C(0)0R A1 , or -C(0)R B1 ; each R A1 and R B1 is independently hydrogen, alkyl, or heteroalkyl; m and n are each independently 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6; p is 0, 1, 2, 3,
  • the compound of Formula (III-c) is a compound of Formula (III-d): or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein X is C(R’)(R”), N(R’), or S(0) x ; each of R’ and R” is independently hydrogen, alkyl, halogen, or cycloalkyl; each of R 2a , R 2b , R 2c , and R 2d is independently hydrogen, alkyl, heteroalkyl, or halo; or R 2a and R 2b or R 2c and R 2d are taken together to form an oxo group; each of R 3 and R 5 is independently alkyl, heteroalkyl, halogen, oxo, -OR A1 , -C(0)0R A1 , or -C(0)R B1 ; each R A1 and R B1 is independently hydrogen, alkyl, or heteroalkyl; m and n are each independently 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6; p is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4,
  • the compound is a compound of Formula (I).
  • L 2 is a bond and P and L 3 are independently absent.
  • the compound is a compound of Formula (I-a).
  • L 2 is a bond, P is heteroaryl, L 3 is a bond, and Z is hydrogen.
  • P is heteroaryl, L 3 is heteroalkyl, and Z is alkyl.
  • L 2 is a bond and P and L 3 are independently absent.
  • L 2 is a bond, P is heteroaryl, L 3 is a bond, and Z is hydrogen.
  • P is heteroaryl, L 3 is heteroalkyl, and Z is alkyl.
  • the compound is a compound of Formula (I-b).
  • P is absent, L 1 is -NHCH2, L 2 is a bond, M is aryl (e.g., phenyl), L 3 is -CH2O, and Z is heterocyclyl (e.g., a nitrogen-containing heterocyclyl, e.g., thiomorpholinyl-1, 1-dioxide).
  • the compound of Formula (I-b) is Compound 116.
  • P is absent, L 1 is -NHCH2, L 2 is a bond, M is absent, L 3 is a bond, and Z is heterocyclyl (e.g., an oxygen-containing heterocyclyl, e.g., tetrahydropyranyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, oxetanyl, or oxiranyl).
  • the compound of Formula (I-b) is Compound 105.
  • the compound is a compound of Formula (I-b-i).
  • each of R 2a and R 2b is independently hydrogen or CFb
  • each of R 2C and R 2d is independently hydrogen
  • m is 1 or 2
  • n is 1
  • X is O
  • p is 0,
  • M 2 is phenyl optionally substituted with one or more R 3
  • R 3 is -CF3
  • Z 2 is heterocyclyl (e.g., an oxygen-containing heterocyclyl, e.g., tetrahydropyranyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, oxetanyl, or oxiranyl).
  • the compound of Formula (I-b-i) is Compound 100, Compound 106, Compound 107, Compound 108, Compound 109, or Compound 111.
  • the compound is a compound of Formula (I-b-ii).
  • each of R 2a , R 2b , R 2c , and R 2d is independently hydrogen, q is 0, p is 0, m is 1, and Z 2 is heterocyclyl (e.g., an oxygen-containing heterocyclyl, e.g., tetrahydropyranyl).
  • the compound of Formula (I-b-ii) is Compound 100.
  • the compound is a compound of Formula (I-c).
  • each of R 2c and R 2d is independently hydrogen, m is 1, p is 1, q is 0, R 5 is -CH3, and Z is heterocyclyl (e.g., a nitrogen-containing heterocyclyl, e.g., piperazinyl).
  • the compound of Formula (I-c) is Compound 113.
  • the compound is a compound of Formula (I-d).
  • each of R 2a , R 2b , R 2c , and R 2d is independently hydrogen, m is 1, n is 3, X is O, p is 0, and Z is heterocyclyl (e.g., an oxygen-containing heterocyclyl, e.g., tetrahydropyranyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, oxetanyl, or oxiranyl).
  • the compound of Formula (I-d) is Compound 110 or Compound 114.
  • the compound is a compound of Formula (I-f).
  • each of R 2a and R 2b is independently hydrogen, n is 1, M is -CH 2 -, P is a nitrogen-containing heteroaryl (e.g., imidazolyl), L 3 is -C(0)OCH 2 -, and Z is CFb.
  • the compound of Formula (I-f) is Compound 115.
  • the compound is a compound of Formula (Il-a).
  • each of R 2a and R 2b is independently hydrogen, n is 1, q is 0, L 3 is -CH 2 (OCH 2 CH 2 )2, and Z is -OCH3.
  • the compound of Formula (Il-a) is Compound 112.
  • each of R 2a and R 2b is independently hydrogen, n is 1, L 3 is a bond or -CH? and Z is hydrogen or -OH .
  • the compound of Formula (Il-a) is Compound 103 or Compound 104.
  • the compound is a compound of Formula (III).
  • each of R 2a , R 2b , R 2c , and R 2d is independently hydrogen, m is 1, n is 2, q is 3, p is 0, R c is hydrogen, and Z 1 is heteroalkyl optionally substituted with R 5 (e.g., - N(CH 3 )(CH 2 CH 2 )S(0) 2 CH 3 ).
  • the compound of Formula (III) is Compound 120
  • the compound is a compound of Formula (Ill-b).
  • each of R 2a , R 2b , R 2c , and R 2d is independently hydrogen, m is 0, n is 2, q is 3, p is 0, and Z 2 is aryl (e.g., phenyl) substituted with 1 R 5 (e.g., -NH 2 ).
  • the compound of Formula (Ill-b) is Compound 102.
  • the compound is a compound of Formula (Ill-b).
  • each of R 2a , R 2b , R 2c , and R 2d is independently hydrogen
  • m is 1
  • n is 2
  • q is 3
  • p is 0,
  • R c is hydrogen
  • Z 2 is heterocyclyl (e.g., an nitrogen-containing heterocyclyl, e.g., a nitrogen-containing spiro heterocyclyl, e.g., 2-oxa-7-azaspiro[3.5]nonanyl).
  • the compound of Formula (Ill-a) is Compound 121.
  • the compound is a compound of Formula (Ill-d).
  • each of R 2a , R 2b , R 2c , and R 2d is independently hydrogen, m is 1, n is 2, q is 1, 2, 3, or 4, p is 0, and X is S(0) 2 .
  • each of R 2a and R 2b is independently hydrogen, m is 1, n is 2, q is 1, 2, 3, or 4, p is 0, and X is S(0) 2 .
  • the compound of Formula (Ill-d) is Compound 101, Compound 117, Compound 118, or Compound 119.
  • the compound is a compound of Formula (I-b), (I-d), or (I-e). In some embodiments, the compound is a compound of Formula (I-b), (I-d), or (II). In some embodiments, the compound is a compound of Formula (I-b), (I-d), or (I-f). In some embodiments, the compound is a compound of Formula (I-b), (I-d), or (III).
  • Exemplary compounds of Formula (I) may be prepared as described in WO 2019/169333 or any other method known to those skilled in the art.
  • the compound of Formula (I) is not a compound disclosed in WO 2012/112982, WO 2012/167223, WO 2014/153126, WO 2016/019391, WO 2017/075630, US 2012-0213708, US 2016-0030359 or US 2016-0030360.
  • the compound of Formula (I) comprises a compound shown in Table 3, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • a device described herein comprises a compound shown in Table 3, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • the compound is a compound of Formula (I) (e.g., Formulas (I-a), (I-b), (I-c), (I-d), (I-e), (I-f), (II), (Il-a), (III), (Ill-a), (Ill-b), (III-c), or (III-d)), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, and is selected from:
  • Formula (I) e.g., Formulas (I-a), (I-b), (I-c), (I-d), (I-e), (I-f), (II), (Il-a), (III), (Ill-a), (Ill-b), (III-c), or (III-d)
  • Formula (I) e.g., Formulas (I-a), (I-b), (I-c), (I-d), (I-e), (I-f), (II), (Il-a), (III), (Ill-a), (Ill-b), (III-c),
  • the device described herein comprises the compound of pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • a device described herein comprises a compound of Formula (I) (e.g., a compound shown in Table 3) covalently bound to an alginate polymer.
  • the alginate polymer can be chemically modified with a compound of Formula (I) using any suitable method known in the art, e.g., as described in WO 2019/195055.
  • Described herein are methods for preventing or treating a disease, disorder, or condition in a subject by administering to the subject a plurality of genetically modified cells described herein that produce a therapeutic agent that treats the disease, disorder or condition.
  • the cells may be administered by implanting into the subject a device containing the cells as described herein, or a preparation of such devices.
  • the device or preparation is implanted (e.g., via laparoscopy) into the intraperitoneal space, e.g., the greater sac of the peritoneal cavity.
  • the genetically modified cells are engineered RPE cells
  • the method comprises administering (e.g., implanting) an effective amount of a composition of two-compartment alginate hydrogel capsules which comprise the engineered RPE cells and a cell-binding polymer described herein in the inner compartment and comprise a Compound of Formula (I), e.g., Compound 101, on the outer capsule surface.
  • the method of treatment directly or indirectly reduces or alleviates at least one symptom of the disease, disorder, or condition and / or the method prevents or slows the onset of the disease, disorder, or condition.
  • the subject is a human.
  • the disease, disorder, or condition affects a system of the body, e.g. the nervous system (e.g., peripheral nervous system (PNS) or central nervous system (CNS)), vascular system, skeletal system, respiratory system, endocrine system, lymph system, reproductive system, or gastrointestinal tract.
  • the disease, disorder, or condition affects a part of the body, e.g., blood, eye, brain, skin, lung, stomach, mouth, ear, leg, foot, hand, liver, heart, kidney, bone, pancreas, spleen, large intestine, small intestine, spinal cord, muscle, ovary, uterus, vagina, or penis.
  • the disease, disorder or condition is a neurodegenerative disease, diabetes, a heart disease, an autoimmune disease, a cancer, a liver disease, a lysosomal storage disease, a blood clotting disorder or a coagulation disorder, an orthopedic condition, an amino acid metabolism disorder.
  • the disease, disorder or condition is a neurodegenerative disease.
  • neurodegenerative diseases include Alzheimer s disease, Huntington s disease, Parkinson Ik disease (PD) amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), multiple sclerosis (MS) and cerebral palsy (CP), dentatorubro-pallidoluysian atrophy (DRPLA), neuronal intranuclear hyaline inclusion disease (NIHID), dementia with Lewy bodies, Down® syndrome, Hallervorden-Spatz disease, prion diseases, argyrophilic grain dementia, cortocobasal degeneration, dementia pugilistica, diffuse neurofibrillary tangles, Gerstmann-Straussler-Scheinker disease, Jakob-Creutzfeldt disease, Niemann-Pick disease type 3, progressive supranuclear palsy, subacute sclerosing panencephalitis, spinocerebellar ataxias, Pick® disease, and dentatorubral-
  • the disease, disorder, or condition is an autoimmune disease, e.g., scleroderma, multiple sclerosis, lupus, or allergies.
  • an autoimmune disease e.g., scleroderma, multiple sclerosis, lupus, or allergies.
  • the disease is a liver disease, e.g., hepatitis B, hepatitis C, cirrhosis,
  • the disease, disorder, or condition is cancer.
  • cancers include leukemia, lymphoma, melanoma, lung cancer, brain cancer (e.g., glioblastoma), sarcoma, pancreatic cancer, renal cancer, liver cancer, testicular cancer, prostate cancer, or uterine cancer.
  • the disease, disorder, or condition is an orthopedic condition.
  • orthopedic conditions include osteoporosis, osteonecrosis, Paget’s disease, or a fracture.
  • the disease, disorder or condition is a lysosomal storage disease.
  • exemplary lysosomal storage diseases include Gaucher disease (e.g., Type I, Type II, Type III), Tay-Sachs disease, Fabry disease, Farber disease, Hurler syndrome (also known as mucopolysaccharidosis type I (MPS I)), Hunter syndrome, lysosomal acid lipase deficiency, Niemann-Pick disease, Salla disease, Sanfilippo syndrome (also known as mucopolysaccharidosis type IIIA (MPS3A)), multiple sulfatase deficiency, Maroteaux-Lamy syndrome, metachromatic leukodystrophy, Krabbe disease, Scheie syndrome, Hurler-Scheie syndrome, Sly syndrome, hyaluronidase deficiency, Pompe disease, Danon disease, gangliosidosis, or Morquio syndrome.
  • Gaucher disease e.g., Type I, Type II, Type III
  • the disease, disorder, or condition is a blood clotting disorder or a coagulation disorder.
  • blood clotting disorders or coagulation disorders include hemophilia (e.g., hemophilia A or hemophilia B), Von Willebrand disease, thrombocytopenia, uremia, Bernard- Soulier syndrome, Factor XII deficiency, vitamin K deficiency, or congenital afibrinogenimia.
  • the disease, disorder, or condition is an amino acid metabolism disorder, e.g., phenylketonuria, tyrosinemia (e.g., Type 1 or Type 2), alkaptonuria, homocystinuria, hyperhomocysteinemia, maple syrup urine disease.
  • amino acid metabolism disorder e.g., phenylketonuria, tyrosinemia (e.g., Type 1 or Type 2), alkaptonuria, homocystinuria, hyperhomocysteinemia, maple syrup urine disease.
  • the disease, disorder, or condition is a fatty acid metabolism disorder, e.g., hyperlipidemia, hypercholesterolemia, galactosemia.
  • the disease, disorder, or condition is a purine or pyrimidine metabolism disorder, e.g., Lesch-Nyhan syndrome.
  • the disease, disorder, or condition is diabetes (e.g., Type I or Type II diabetes). In some embodiments, the disease, disorder or condition is not Type I diabetes. In some embodiments, the disease, disorder or condition is not Type II diabetes.
  • a genetically modified cell comprising at least one exogenous transcription unit inserted into at least one genomic open chromatin region (OCR), wherein the cell is derived from a human cell and the OCR is selected from the group consisting of: a. a first OCR on Chromosome 2 (Chr 2) and located between nucleotide positions corresponding to positions 100817157 and 100818556 in the human hgl9 reference genome (hgl9) sequence for Chr 2; b. a first OCR on Chr 2 which comprises SEQ ID NO: 1 or a nucleotide sequence that is at least 90%, 95%, 98%, or 99% identical to SEQ ID NO:l; c.
  • OCR genomic open chromatin region
  • a second OCR on Chromosome 5 Chromosome 5 (Chr 5) and located between nucleotide positions corresponding to 53853682 and 53854987 of the hgl9 sequence for Chr 5; d. a second OCR on Chr 5 which comprises SEQ ID NO:2 or a nucleotide sequence that is at least 90%, 95%, 98%, or 99% identical to SEQ ID NO:2; e. a third OCR on Chromosome 12 (Chr 12) and located between nucleotide positions corresponding to 122186354 and 122187572 in the hgl9 sequence for Chr 12; f.
  • a third OCR on Chr 12 which comprises SEQ ID NO:3 or a nucleotide sequence that is at least 90%, 95%, 98%, or 99% identical to SEQ ID NO:3; g. a fourth OCR on Chromosome 8 (Chr 8) and located between nucleotide positions corresponding to 30,105,939 and 30,105,944 in the human hg38 reference genome sequence for Chr 8; and h. a fourth OCR on Chr 12 which comprises SEQ ID NO:26 or a nucleotide sequence that is at least 90%, 95%, 98%, or 99% identical to SEQ ID NO:26.
  • the genetically modified cell of embodiment 20, which is derived from the ARPE-19 cell line and the coding sequence is for a FVIII-BDD protein which comprises an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NO:8, SEQ ID NO: 10, SEQ ID NO: 12, SEQ ID NO : 13 , SEQ ID NO : 14 and SEQ ID NO : 15.
  • the genetically modified cell of embodiment 20, which is derived from the ARPE-19 cell line and the coding sequence is for a Factor IX protein which comprises the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO: 16.
  • the genetically modified cell of embodiment 20, which is derived from the ARPE-19 cell line and the coding sequence is for a Factor VII protein which comprises SEQ ID NO: 18 and the coding sequence is SEQ ID NO: 19 or SEQ ID NO:20.
  • the genetically modified cell of embodiment 20, which is derived from the ARPE-19 cell line and the coding sequence is for a GLA protein which comprises an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NO:21, SEQ ID NO:24 and SEQ ID NO:25.
  • composition comprising a plurality of genetically modified cells, wherein each cell in the plurality is a genetically modified cell as defined by any one of embodiments 1 to 28.
  • composition of embodiment 29, wherein the plurality of cells is obtained by culturing a monoclonal cell line.
  • composition of embodiment 29 or 30, wherein the cells are suspended in a storage medium are suspended in a storage medium.
  • a device comprising the composition of any one of embodiments 29 to 31.
  • An implantable device which comprises at least one cell-containing compartment comprising a genetically modified cell or a plurality of the genetically modified cell and at least one means for mitigating the foreign body response (FBR) when the device is implanted into the subject, wherein the genetically modified cell or each cell in the plurality is a genetically modified cell as defined by any one of embodiments 1 to 28.
  • FBR foreign body response
  • the at least one cell-containing compartment comprises a polymer composition which encapsulates the plurality of engineered RPE cells, and optionally comprises at least one cell-binding substance (CBS).
  • CBS cell-binding substance
  • the cell-containing compartment comprises an alginate hydrogel and is surrounded by a barrier compartment, which comprises an alginate hydrogel and optionally comprises a compound of Formula (I), e.g., Compound 101, disposed on the outer surface of the barrier compartment.
  • a barrier compartment which comprises an alginate hydrogel and optionally comprises a compound of Formula (I), e.g., Compound 101, disposed on the outer surface of the barrier compartment.
  • the barrier compartment comprises an alginate chemically modified with Compound 101.
  • the polymer composition comprises an alginate covalently modified with a peptide, wherein the peptide consists essentially of or consists of GRGDSP, GGRGDSP or GGGRGDSP.
  • the device of any one of embodiments 32 to 37 which is a hydrogel capsule of about 0.75 mm to about 2 mm in diameter, wherein the hydrogel capsule comprises an inner compartment surrounded by an outer compartment, wherein the genetically modified cells are contained in the inner compartment and the outer compartment is substantially free of the cells.
  • each device in the preparation is a device as defined in any one of embodiments 32 to 38.
  • a method of treating a subject for hemophilia A comprising: providing a preparation of devices which contain a plurality of genetically modified cells expressing a Factor VIII protein; and disposing the preparation in the body of the subject; wherein each cell in the plurality is the genetically modified cell of any one of embodiments 21 to 23.
  • ARPE-19 cells were engineered to express a FVIII-BDD protein using the PiggyBac transposon system, which is capable of mediating transfer of a transcription unit between a plasmid vector and TTAA chromosomal sites through a “cut and paste” mechanism.
  • ARPE-19 cells were split and seeded at 400,000 cells per 6-well culture plate and then co-transfected with varying amounts of two plasmids: (1) a transposon vector comprising a transcription unit encoding SEQ ID NO:8 inserted between inverted terminal repeat (ITR) elements recognized by a PiggyBac transposase and (2) a helper plasmid that expresses a piggyBac transposase enzyme and a fluorescent reporter protein (FRP).
  • the transcription unit consisted of the FVIII-BDD coding sequence (SEQ ID NO:9) inserted between nucleotides 2099 and 2100 of SEQ ID NO:7.
  • FACS fluorescence activated cell sorting
  • the pool with the highest FVIII-BDD supernatant levels was selected for clone isolation and screening for FVIII-BDD expression and genomic copy number.
  • a total of 1030 clones were screened: 66 of these clones were identified as being genetically modified with 1 to 8 copies of the FVIII-BDD transcription unit, with the majority of clones having 1 copy. Most of the 66 genetically modified clones failed to divide to sufficient numbers necessary for cell banking.
  • ELISA measurement of FVIII-BDD expression was performed on culture supernatants of the 16 clones that expanded out of wells in a 96-well plate and varying amounts of FVIII-BDD levels were observed (data not shown). Six of the 16 clones failed to expand for final banking.
  • Table 4 Characteristics of certain FVIII-BDD expressing clonal cell lines.
  • Clone No. 1 had the highest and most consistent FVIII-BDD production, with good growth characteristics.
  • the genome of this clone was analyzed to determine the number and location of inserted transcription units, with the results showing insertion of a single transcription unit at each of three sites, which correspond to positions 100,817,368 and 100,817,374 in the hgl9 sequence for Chr 2; positions 53,853,740 and 53,853,741 in the hgl9 sequence for Chr 5; positions 122,186,872 and 122,186,877 in the hgl9 sequence for Chr 12.
  • Genetically modified ARPE-19 cells comprising a stably integrated exogenous transcription unit as described herein may be cultured to produce a composition of cells suitable for encapsulation in two compartment hydrogel capsules.
  • Cells are grown in complete growth medium (DMEM:F12 with 10% FBS) in 150 cm 2 cell culture flasks or CellSTACK® Culture Chambers (Coming Inc., Coming, NY).
  • DMEM complete growth medium
  • CellSTACK® Culture Chambers Coming Inc., Coming, NY.
  • the medium in the culture flask are aspirated, and the cell layer is briefly rinsed with phosphate buffered saline (pH 7.4, 137 mMNaCl, 2.7 mM KC1, 8 mM Na 2 HP0 4 , and 2 mM KH 2 P0 4 , Gibco).
  • TrypsinEDTA trypsin/ 0.53 mM EDTA solution
  • the flasks are placed at 37°C to facilitate dispersal.
  • 10 mL complete growth medium is added and the cells are aspirated by gentle pipetting.
  • the cell suspension is transferred to a centrifuge tube and spun down at approximately 125 x g for 5-10 minutes to remove TrypsinEDTA. The supernatant is discarded, and the cells are resuspended in fresh growth medium. Appropriate aliquots of cell suspension are added to new culture vessels, which are incubated at 37 °C. The medium is renewed weekly.
  • a polymeric material may be chemically modified with a compound of Formula (I) (or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof) prior to formation of a device described herein (e.g., a hydrogel capsule).
  • a device described herein e.g., a hydrogel capsule.
  • the alginate carboxylic acid is activated for coupling to one or more amine-functionalized compounds to achieve an alginate modified with an afibrotic compound, e.g., a compound of Formula (I).
  • the alginate polymer is dissolved in water (30 mL/gram polymer) and treated with 2-chloro-4,6- dimethoxy-l,3,5-triazine (0.5 eq) and N-methylmorpholine (1 eq).
  • a solution of the compound of interest e.g., Compound 101 shown in Table 3
  • acetonitrile 0.3M
  • the amounts of the compound and coupling reagent added depends on the desired concentration of the compound bound to the alginate, e.g., conjugation density.
  • a medium conjugation density of Compound 101 typically ranges from 2% to 5% N, while a high conjugation density of Compound 101 typically ranges from 5.1% to 8% N.
  • CM-LMW-Alg-101-Medium polymer To prepare a solution of low molecular weight alginate, chemically modified with a medium conjugation density of Compound 101 (CM-LMW-Alg-101-Medium polymer), the dissolved unmodified low molecular weight alginate (approximate MW ⁇ 75 kDa, G:M ratio > 1.5) is treated with 2-chloro-4,6-dimethoxy- 1,3,5-triazine (5.1 mmol/g alginate) and N-methylmorpholine (10.2 mmol/ g alginate) and Compound 101 (5.4 mmol/ g alginate).
  • 2-chloro-4,6-dimethoxy- 1,3,5-triazine 5.1 mmol/g alginate
  • N-methylmorpholine (10.2 mmol/ g alginate
  • Compound 101 5.4 mmol/ g alginate
  • CM-LMW-Alg-101-High polymer To prepare a solution of low molecular weight alginate, chemically modified with a high conjugation density of Compound 101 (CM-LMW-Alg-101-High polymer), the dissolved unmodified low-molecular weight alginate (approximate MW ⁇ 75 kDa, G:M ratio > 1.5) is treated with 2-chloro-4,6-dimethoxy-l,3,5-triazine (5.1 mmol/g alginate) and N-methylmorpholine (10.2 mmol/ g alginate) and Compound 101 (10.5 mmol/ g alginate). The reaction is warmed to 55°C for 16h, then cooled to room temperature and gently concentrated via rotary evaporation, then the residue is dissolved in water.
  • 2-chloro-4,6-dimethoxy-l,3,5-triazine 5.1 mmol/g alginate
  • N-methylmorpholine (10.2 mmol
  • the mixture is filtered through a bed of cyano-modified silica gel (Silicycle) and the filter cake is washed with water.
  • the resulting solution is then extensively dialyzed (10,000 MWCO membrane) and the alginate solution is concentrated via lyophilization to provide the desired chemically-modified alginate as a solid or is concentrated using any technique suitable to produce a chemically modified alginate solution with a viscosity of 25 cP to 35 cP.
  • the conjugation density of a chemically modified alginate is measured by combustion analysis for percent nitrogen.
  • the sample is prepared by dialyzing a solution of the chemically modified alginate against water (10,000 MWCO membrane) for 24 hours, replacing the water twice followed by lyophilization to a constant weight.
  • a polymeric material may be covalently modified with a cell-binding peptide prior to formation of a device described herein (e.g., a hydrogel capsule described herein) using methods known in the art, see, e.g., Jeon O, et ah, Tissue Eng Part A. 16:2915-2925 (2010) and Rowley, J.A. et ah, Biomaterials 20:45-53 (1999).
  • an alginate solution (1%, w/v) is prepared with 50mM of 2-(N-morpholino)-ethanesulfonic acid hydrate buffer solution containing 0.5M NaCl at pH 6.5, and sequentially mixed with N-hydroxysuccinimide and 1 -ethyl-3 -[3 -(dimethylamino)propyl] carbodiimide (EDC).
  • EDC N-hydroxysuccinimide
  • the molar ratio of N-hydroxysuccinimide to EDC is 0.5:1.0.
  • the peptide of interest is added to the alginate solution.
  • the amounts of peptide and coupling reagent added depends on the desired concentration of the peptide bound to the alginate, e.g., peptide conjugation density. By increasing the amount of peptide and coupling reagent, higher conjugation density can be obtained. After reacting for 24 h, the reaction is purified by dialysis against ultrapure deionized water (diH20) (MWCO 3500) for 3 days, treated with activated charcoal for 30 min, filtered (0.22 mm filter), and concentrated to the desired viscosity.
  • diH20 ultrapure deionized water
  • the conjugation density of a peptide-modified alginate is measured by combustion analysis for percent nitrogen.
  • the sample is prepared by dialyzing a solution of the chemically modified alginate against water (10,000 MWCO membrane) for 24 hours, replacing the water twice followed by lyophilization to a constant weight.
  • Example 4 Preparation of exemplary alginate solutions for making hydrogel capsules 70:30 mixture of chemically-modified and unmodified alginate.
  • a low molecular weight alginate (PRONOVATM VLVG alginate, NovaMatrix, Sandvika, Norway, cat. #4200506, approximate molecular weight ⁇ 75 kDa; G:M ratio > 1 .5) is chemically modified with Compound 101 to produce chemically modified low molecular weight alginate (CM-LMW-Alg-101) solution with a viscosity of 25 cp to 35 cP and a conjugation density of 5.1% to 8% N, as determined by combustion analysis for percent nitrogen.
  • CM-LMW-Alg-101 chemically modified low molecular weight alginate
  • a solution of high molecular weight unmodified alginate (U-HMW-Alg) is prepared by dissolving unmodified alginate (PRONOVATM SLG100, NovaMatrix, Sandvika, Norway, cat. #4202106, approximate molecular weight of 150 kDa - 250 kDa) at 3% weight to volume in 0.9% saline.
  • the CM-LMW-Alg solution is blended with the U- HMW-Alg solution at a volume ratio of 70% CM-LMW-Alg to 30% U-HMW-Alg (referred to herein as a 70:30 CM-Alg:UM-Alg solution).
  • Unmodified alginate solution An unmodified medium molecular weight alginate (SLG20, NovaMatrix, Sandvika, Norway, cat. #4202006, approximate molecular weight of 75-150 kDa), is dissolved at 1.4% weight to volume in 0.9% saline to prepare a U-MMW-Alg solution.
  • Unmodified alginate solution An unmodified medium molecular weight alginate (SLG20, NovaMatrix, Sandvika, Norway, cat. #4202006, approximate molecular weight of 75-150 kDa), is dissolved at 1.4% weight to volume in 0.9% saline to prepare a U-MMW-Alg solution.
  • a solution of SLG20 alginate is modified with a peptide consisting of GRGDSP as described above and concentrated to a viscosity of about lOOcP.
  • the amount of the peptide and coupling reagent used are selected to achieve a target peptide conjugation density of about 0.2 to 0.3, as measured by combustion analysis.
  • Example 5 Formation of exemplary two-compartment hydrogel capsules
  • a desired volume of a composition comprising the cells are centrifuged at 1,400 r.p.m. for 1 min and washed with calcium-free Krebs-Henseleit (KH) Buffer (4.7 mM KC1, 25 mM HEPES, 1.2 mM KH2PO4, 1.2 mM MgS0 4 x 7H 2 0, 135 mM NaCl, pH ⁇ 7.4, -290 mOsm). After washing, the cells ae centrifuged again and all of the supernatant is aspirated.
  • KH calcium-free Krebs-Henseleit Buffer
  • the cell pellet is resuspended in the GRGDSP -modified alginate solution described in Example 3 at a desired cell density (e.g., about 50 to 150 million suspended single cells per ml alginate solution).
  • a desired cell density e.g., about 50 to 150 million suspended single cells per ml alginate solution.
  • buffers and alginate solutions Prior to fabricating hydrogel capsules, buffers and alginate solutions are sterilized by filtration through a 0.2-mih filter using aseptic processes.
  • an electrostatic droplet generator is set up as follows: an ES series 0-100-kV, 20-watt high-voltage power generator (EQ series, Matsusada, NC, EISA) is connected to the top and bottom of a coaxial needle (inner lumen of 22G, outer lumen of 18G, Rame-Hart Instrument Co., Succasunna, NJ, USA).
  • the inner lumen is attached to a first 5-ml Luer-lock syringe (BD, NJ, USA), which is connected to a syringe pump (Pump 11 Pico Plus, Harvard Apparatus, Holliston, MA, USA) that is oriented vertically.
  • the outer lumen is connected via a luer coupling to a second 5-ml Luer-lock syringe which is connected to a second syringe pump (Pump 11 Pico Plus) that is oriented horizontally.
  • a first alginate solution containing the genetically modified cells (as single cells) suspended in a GRGDSP-modified alginate solution is placed in the first syringe and a cell-free alginate solution comprising a mixture of a chemically-modified alginate and unmodified alginate is placed in the second syringe.
  • the two syringe pumps move the first and second alginate solutions from the syringes through both lumens of the coaxial needle and single droplets containing both alginate solutions are extruded from the needle into a glass dish containing a cross-linking solution.
  • the settings of each Pico Plus syringe pump are 12.06 mm diameter and the flow rates of each pump are adjusted to achieve a flow rate ratio of 1 : 1 for the two alginate solutions.
  • the flow rate for each alginate solution was about 5 mL/h.
  • Control (empty) capsules are prepared in the same manner except that the alginate solution used for the inner compartment is a cell-free solution.
  • the alginate droplets are crosslinked for five minutes in a cross-linking solution which contained 25mM HEPES buffer, 20 mM BaCh, 0.2M mannitol and 0.01% of poloxamer 188.
  • a cross-linking solution which contained 25mM HEPES buffer, 20 mM BaCh, 0.2M mannitol and 0.01% of poloxamer 188.
  • Capsules that fall to the bottom of the crosslinking vessel are collected by pipetting into a conical tube. After the capsules settle in the tube, the crosslinking buffer is removed, and capsules are washed four times in HEPES buffer, two times in 0.9% saline, and two times in culture media and stored in an incubator at 37°C.

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Genetics & Genomics (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Biotechnology (AREA)
  • Zoology (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Wood Science & Technology (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Microbiology (AREA)
  • Biochemistry (AREA)
  • Cell Biology (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Plant Pathology (AREA)
  • Biophysics (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Developmental Biology & Embryology (AREA)
  • Mycology (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Immunology (AREA)
  • Virology (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Neurosurgery (AREA)
  • Ophthalmology & Optometry (AREA)
  • Dermatology (AREA)
  • Neurology (AREA)
  • Micro-Organisms Or Cultivation Processes Thereof (AREA)
  • Medicines Containing Material From Animals Or Micro-Organisms (AREA)

Abstract

Described herein are genetically modified cells derived from a human cell and which contain at least one exogenous transcription unit inserted into at least one of four open chromatin regions (OCRs) located on Chromosomes 2, 5, 8 and 12, as well as compositions, pharmaceutical preparations, and implantable devices comprising the genetically modified cells, and methods of using the same for preventing or treating a disease, disorder, or condition.

Description

MONOCLONAL CELL LINES EXPRESSING AN EXOGENOUS SUBSTANCE AND
USES THEREOF
BACKGROUND
Treating chronic and genetic diseases by implanting cells engineered to produce a therapeutic substance capable of treating such diseases has exciting potential to improve the health of patients with such diseases. To fully achieve the potential of such therapies, the implanted cells must be capable of producing therapeutic levels of the desired therapeutic substance for several weeks, months or even longer under conditions in which a selection marker is undesirable. Thus, a general approach to achieve stable, high level expression of the therapeutic substance is to implant engineered cells from a monoclonal cell line in which the therapeutic substance is encoded by an exogenous coding sequence inserted into one or more locations in the cell genome. However, generating a suitable monoclonal cell line is a time-consuming and expensive research endeavor because it is unpredictable which genomic locations will allow long-term acceptable expression levels of the therapeutic substance without transgene silencing and with minimal negative effects on the functioning and viability of the engineered cells.
SUMMARY
The present disclosure is based on the identification of specific open chromatin regions in the genome of a human retinal pigment epithelial (RPE) cell line that are suitable insertion sites for an exogenous transcription unit to achieve stable, high expression of a polypeptide encoded by the exogenous transcription unit.
Described herein is a genetically modified cell derived from a human cell, e.g., an immortalized human cell, and comprising at least one exogenous transcription unit inserted into at least one of three open chromatin regions (OCRs) located on Chromosomes 2, 5 and 12, or into at least one of four OCRs located on Chromosomes 2, 5, 8 and 12. In an embodiment, the insertion site of the transcription unit is defined by reference to certain nucleotide positions in the human hgl9 reference genome (hgl9) sequences for these chromosomes: the Chr 2 OCR is located between nucleotide positions corresponding to 100817157 and 100818556; the Chr 5 OCR is located nucleotide positions corresponding to 53853682 and 53854987; the Chr 12 OCR is located between nucleotide positions corresponding to 122186354 and 122187572. In an embodiment, the insertion site of the transcription unit in Chr 8 is defined by reference to certain nucleotide positions in the human hg38 reference genome (hg38) sequence for Chr 8: the OCR is located between nucleotide positions corresponding to 30,105,499 and 30,106,497. In another embodiment, the location of one or more of the OCRs is defined in reference to a nucleotide sequence present in the corresponding hgl9 chromosome sequence: the Chr 2 OCR comprises SEQ ID NO:l or a nucleotide sequence that is at least 90%, 95%, 98%, or 99% identical to SEQ ID NO:l; the Chr 5 OCR comprises SEQ ID NO:2 or a nucleotide sequence that is at least 90%, 95%, 98%, or 99% identical to SEQ ID NO:2; the Chr 8 OCR comprises SEQ ID NO:26 or a nucleotide sequence that is at least 90%, 95%, 98%, or 99% identical to SEQ ID NO:26; and the Chr 12 OCR comprises SEQ ID NO:3 or a nucleotide sequence that is at least 90%, 95%, 98%, or 99% identical to SEQ ID NO:3. In an embodiment, the exogenous transcription unit is inserted into one, two, three or four of the following locations: between two nucleotide positions corresponding to 211 and 218 in SEQ ID NO:l; between two nucleotide positions corresponding to 59 and 60 in SEQ ID NO:2; between two nucleotide positions corresponding to 440 and 445 in SEQ ID NO:26; and between two nucleotide positions corresponding to 518 and 525 in SEQ ID NO:3.
In an embodiment, the genetically modified cell is derived from a human epithelial cell. In an embodiment, the genetically modified cell is derived from an RPE cell, e.g, an immortalized human RPE cell. In an embodiment, the genetically modified cell is derived from a human cell line available from the American Type Culture Collection (Manassas, VA), e.g., the ARPE-19 (ATCC® CRL-2302™) cell line or the hTERT RPE-1 (ATCC® CRL-4000™) cell line.
In some embodiments, the exogenous transcription unit comprises a promoter sequence operably linked to a coding sequence for a polypeptide and a poly A signal sequence operably linked to the coding sequence. The promoter, poly A signal sequences are preferably selected to achieve high expression of the polypeptide in the parental human cell line. In an embodiment, the genetically modified cell is derived from the ARPE-19 cell line, the promoter consists essentially of, or consists of, SEQ ID NO:4 or SEQ ID NO:5, and the poly A signal sequence consists essentially of, or consists of, SEQ ID NO:6. The coding sequence is preferably codon-optimized for expression of the polypeptide in the parental cell line. In an embodiment, the polypeptide is constitutively expressed by the genetically modified cell when the cell is cultured in vitro. In an embodiment, the polypeptide is a blood clotting factor, e.g., a human FVIII protein. The present disclosure also provides a composition comprising a plurality of genetically modified cells described herein and a method of manufacturing the composition. In an embodiment, the composition comprises a cell culture media or a storage medium. In an embodiment, the composition comprises a polymer solution in which the cells are suspended, e.g., a polymer solution described herein, e.g., comprising alginate and a cell-binding substance. In an embodiment, the method of manufacturing the composition comprises culturing a plurality of a genetically modified cell described herein until a desired number of cultured cells has been produced, and combining the desired number of cultured cells with a cell culture media, a storage medium or a polymer solution.
In yet another aspect, the present disclosure provides a device comprising at least one cell- containing compartment which comprises a genetically modified cell described herein or a plurality of such cells. In some embodiments, the device comprises a polymer composition encapsulating the genetically modified cell(s). In an embodiment, the encapsulating polymer composition comprises at least one cell binding-substance (CBS), e.g., a cell binding peptide, e.g., RGD or RGDSP. In some embodiments, the device further comprises at least one means for mitigating the foreign body response (FBR) when the device is placed inside a subject. In an embodiment, the means for mitigating the FBR comprises an afibrotic compound, as defined herein, disposed on an exterior surface of the device and/or within a barrier compartment surrounding the cell-containing compartment. In an embodiment, the afibrotic compound is a compound of Formula (I):
Figure imgf000004_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein the variables A, L1, M, L2, P, L3, and Z, as well as related subvariables, are defined herein. In some embodiments, the compound of Formula
(I) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof (e.g., Formulas (I-a), (I-b), (I-c), (I-d), (I-e), (I-f),
(II), (Il-a), (III), (IH-a), (Ill-b), (III-c), or (III-d)) is a compound described herein, including for example, one of the compounds shown in Table 3 herein. In an embodiment, the afibrotic compound is Compound 100, Compound 101 or Compound 102 shown in Table 3.
In one aspect, a device of the disclosure is a 2-compartment hydrogel capsule (e.g., a microcapsule (less than 1 mm in diameter) or a millicapsule (at least 1 mm in diameter)) in which a cell-containing compartment (e.g., the inner compartment) comprising a plurality of live genetically modified cells described herein (and optionally one or more cell binding substances) is surrounded by a barrier compartment comprising an afibrotic polymer (e.g., the outer compartment, e.g., hydrogel layer). In an embodiment, the afibrotic polymer comprises an afibrotic compound. In an embodiment, the afibrotic compound is a compound of Formula (I).
In another aspect, the present disclosure features a preparation (e.g., a composition) comprising a plurality (at least any of 3, 6, 12, 25, 50 or more) of a cell-containing device described herein, e.g, a preparation of hydrogel capsules encapsulating genetically modified RPE cells. In some embodiments, the preparation is a pharmaceutically acceptable composition.
In another aspect, the present disclosure features a method of making or manufacturing a device comprising a genetically modified cell described herein. In some embodiments, the method comprises providing the genetically modified cell, or a plurality of such cells, and disposing the cell(s) in an enclosing component, e.g., a cell-containing compartment of the device as described herein. In some embodiments, the enclosing component comprises a flexible polymer (e.g., PLA, PLG, PEG, CMC, or a polysaccharide, e.g., alginate). In some embodiments, the enclosing component comprises an inflexible polymer or metal housing. In some embodiments, the surface of the device is chemically modified, e.g., with a compound of Formula (I) as described herein.
In another aspect, the present disclosure features a method of evaluating a composition, device or device preparation described herein. In some embodiments, the method comprises providing the composition, device or device preparation and evaluating a functional parameter of the composition, device or device preparation. In an embodiment, the functional parameter is the amount of the exogenous polypeptide produced by the cells in the composition, device or device preparation in vitro (e.g., when placed in a suitable culture medium) and/or in vivo (e.g., after implant into a subject, e.g., a non-human subject or a human subject).
In another aspect, the present disclosure features a method of treating a subject in need of therapy with an exogenous polypeptide expressed by a genetically modified cell described herein. The method comprises administering to the subject a device or device preparation comprising the genetically modified cell. In some embodiments, the administering step comprises placing into the subject a pharmaceutically acceptable preparation comprising a plurality of devices, each of which has the ability to produce the exogenous polypeptide. In some embodiments, the device or device preparation is administered to, placed in, or provided to a site other than the central nervous system, brain, spinal column, eye, or retina. In some embodiments, the implantable dementis administered to, placed in, or injected in the peritoneal cavity (e.g., the lesser sac), the omentum, or the subcutaneous fat of a subject. In an embodiment, the method further comprises measuring the amount or activity of the exogenous polypeptide present in a tissue sample removed from the subject, e.g., in plasma separated from a blood sample, a liver biopsy. In an embodiment, the tissue sample is removed at 15, 30, 60 or 120 days after administration, implantation, or placement of the device or device preparation. In some embodiments, the subject is a human. In an embodiment, the patient has been diagnosed with hemophilia A and the polypeptide is a FVIII protein.
The details of one or more embodiments of the disclosure are set forth herein. Other features, objects, and advantages of the disclosure will be apparent from the Detailed Description, the Figures, the Examples, and the Claims.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
FIGS. 1A-1D show nucleotide sequences from the human hgl9 genome for four OCRs that contain suitable transcription unit insertion sites for genetically modified cells of the present disclosure, with FIG. 1A (SEQ ID NO:l) showing the reference nucleotide sequence of an OCR on Chr 2, FIG. IB (SEQ ID NO:2) showing the reference nucleotide sequence of an OCR on Chr 5, FIG. 1C (SEQ ID NO:3) showing the reference nucleotide sequence of an OCR on Chr 12, FIG. ID (SEQ ID NO:26) showing the reference nucleotide sequence of an OCR on Chr 8, and bold, italics underlining indicating the 5’ and 3’ boundaries of four specific insertion sites for an exogenous transcription unit encoding an FVIII-BDD protein in a clonal cell line derived from ARPE-19 cells.
FIG. 2 shows nucleotide sequences for various exogenous transcription unit elements that are useful to generate exemplary genetically modified cells of the present disclosure, with FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B showing nucleotide sequences of two different promoters (SEQ ID NO: 4 and SEQ ID NO:5), FIG 2C showing the nucleotide sequence of a poly A signal sequence (SEQ ID NO:6), and FIG. 2D showing the nucleotide sequence of a complete exemplary transcription unit (SEQ ID NO:7), with underlining indicating the promoter sequence, shading indicating the Kozak sequence, [ORF] indicating the insertion site for a coding sequence for a polypeptide of interest, and bold italics indicating the polyA signal sequence.
FIG. 3A shows the amino acid sequence (SEQ ID NO: 8) of an exemplary human FVIII- BDD protein, with underlining indicating the signal peptide. FIG. 3B shows an exemplary codon optimized nucleotide sequence (SEQ ID NO: 9) for expressing the human FVIII-BDD protein of SEQ ID NO: 8 in a genetically modified ARPE-19 cell of the present disclosure.
FIG. 3C shows the amino acid sequence (SEQ ID NO: 10) of an exemplary human single chain FVIII-BDD protein, with underlining indicating the signal peptide.
FIG. 3D shows an exemplary codon optimized nucleotide sequence (SEQ ID NO: 11) for expressing the human single-chain FVIII-BDD protein of SEQ ID NO: 10 in genetically modified ARPE-19 cell of the present disclosure.
FIGs. 3E, 3F and 3G show the amino acid sequences (SEQ ID NO: 12, 13 and 14) of other exemplary human single chain FVIII-BDD proteins, with underlining indicating the signal peptide.
FIG. 3H shows the amino acid sequence (SEQ ID NO: 15) of another exemplary human FVIII-BDD protein, with underlining indicating the signal peptide.
FIG. 4A shows the amino acid sequence (SEQ ID NO: 16) of an exemplary human FIX protein, with underlining indicating the signal peptide.
FIG. 4B shows an exemplary codon optimized nucleotide sequence (SEQ ID NO: 17) for expressing the human FIX protein of SEQ ID NO: 16 in a genetically modified ARPE-19 cell of the present disclosure.
FIG. 5A shows the amino acid sequence (SEQ ID NO: 18) of an exemplary human FVII protein, with underlining indicating the signal peptide.
FIG. 5B and FIG. 5C show exemplary codon optimized nucleotide sequences (SEQ ID NO: 19 and SEQ ID NO:20) for expressing the human FVII protein of SEQ ID NO: 18 in a genetically modified ARPE-19 cell of the present disclosure.
FIG. 6A shows the amino acid sequence (SEQ ID NO:21) of an exemplary human GLA protein, with underlining indicating the signal peptide.
FIG. 6B and FIG. 6C show exemplary codon optimized nucleotide sequences (SEQ ID NO:22 and SEQ ID NO:23)) for expressing the human GLA protein of SEQ ID NO:21 in a genetically modified ARPE-19 cell of the present disclosure.
FIG. 6D shows the amino acid sequence (SEQ ID NO:24) of an exemplary human GLA fusion protein, with underlining indicating the signal peptide. FIG. 6E shows an exemplary codon optimized nucleotide sequence (SEQ ID NO:25) for expressing the human GLA fusion protein of SEQ ID NO:24 in a genetically modified ARPE-19 cell of the present disclosure.
FIG. 7 illustrates an exemplary device of the disclosure (e.g., a two compartment hydrogel capsule), with lines indicating: a first, inner compartment formed from a polymer covalently attached to a cell binding peptide and genetically modified cells encapsulated therein; a second compartment (e.g., layer); and an afibrotic compound disposed within the second compartment and on the surface of the capsule.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION
The present disclosure features genetically modified human cells (e.g., derived from human RPE cells, e.g., ARPE-19 cells), which have been engineered to produce an exogenous polypeptide of interest by inserting an exogenous transcription unit into one or more specific genomic OCRs that have been shown to allow stable, high level expression of a polypeptide encoded by the transcription unit. The present disclosure also provides compositions, devices and device preparations comprising such genetically modified cells. In some embodiments, the genetically modified cells, compositions, and devices are useful for delivering a therapeutic polypeptide to a subject in need of treatment with the therapeutic polypeptide.
Definitions
So that the disclosure may be more readily understood, certain technical and scientific terms used herein are specifically defined below. Unless specifically defined elsewhere in this document, all other technical and scientific terms used herein have the meaning commonly understood by one of ordinary skill in the art to which this disclosure belongs.
As used herein, including the appended claims, the singular forms of words such as "a," "an," and "the," include their corresponding plural references unless the context clearly dictates otherwise.
“About" or “approximately” when used herein to modify a numerically defined parameter (e.g., amount of genetically modified cells in a composition or device (e.g., hydrogel capsule), a physical description of a device such as diameter, sphericity, number of cells encapsulated therein, the number of devices in a preparation), means that the recited numerical value is within an acceptable functional range for the defined parameter as determined by one of ordinary skill in the art, which will depend in part on how the numerical value is measured or determined, e.g., the limitations of the measurement system, including the acceptable error range for that measurement system. For example, “about” can mean a range of 20% above and below the recited numerical value. As a non -limiting example, a device defined as having a diameter of about 1.5 millimeters (mm) and encapsulating about 5 million (M) cells may have a diameter of 1.2 to 1.8 mm and may encapsulate 4 M to 6 M cells. As another non-limiting example, a preparation of about 100 devices (e.g., hydrogel capsules) includes preparations having 80 to 120 devices. In some embodiments, the term “about” means that the modified parameter may vary by as much as 15%, 10% or 5% above and below the stated numerical value for that parameter.
“Acquire” or “acquiring” as used herein, refer to obtaining possession of a value, e.g., a numerical value, or image, or a physical entity (e.g., a sample), by “directly acquiring” or “indirectly acquiring” the value or physical entity. “Directly acquiring” means performing a process (e.g., performing an analytical method or protocol) to obtain the value or physical entity. “Indirectly acquiring” refers to receiving the value or physical entity from another party or source (e.g., a third party laboratory that directly acquired the physical entity or value). Directly acquiring a value or physical entity includes performing a process that includes a physical change in a physical substance or the use of a machine or device. Examples of directly acquiring a value include obtaining a sample from a human subject. Directly acquiring a value includes performing a process that uses a machine or device, e.g., using a fluorescence microscope to acquire fluorescence microscopy data.
“Administer,” “administering,” or “administration,” as used herein, refer to implanting, absorbing, ingesting, injecting, placing or otherwise introducing into a subject, an entity described herein (e.g., a device or a preparation of devices), or providing such an entity to a subject for administration.
“Afibrotic”, as used herein, means a compound or material that mitigates the foreign body response (FBR) to an implanted device. For example, the amount of FBR in a biological tissue that is induced by implant into that tissue of a device (e.g., a hydrogel capsule) comprising an afibrotic compound (e.g., a hydrogel capsule comprising a polymer covalently modified with a compound listed in Table 3) is lower than the FBR induced by implantation of an afibrotic-null reference device, i.e., a device that lacks any afibrotic compound, but is of substantially the same composition (e.g., same CBP-polymer, same cell type(s)) and structure (e.g., size, shape, no. of compartments). In an embodiment, the degree of the FBR is assessed by the immunological response in the tissue containing the implanted device (e.g., hydrogel capsule), which may include, for example, protein adsorption, macrophages, multinucleated foreign body giant cells, fibroblasts, and angiogenesis, using assays known in the art, e.g., as described in WO 2017/075630, or using one or more of the assays / methods described Vegas, A., et al., Nature Biotechnol (supra), (e.g., subcutaneous cathepsin measurement of implanted capsules, Masson’s tri chrome (MT), hematoxylin or eosin staining of tissue sections, quantification of collagen density, cellular staining and confocal microscopy for macrophages (CD68 or F4/80), myofibroblasts (alpha- muscle actin, SMA) or general cellular deposition, quantification of 79 RNA sequences of known inflammation factors and immune cell markers, or FACS analysis for macrophage and neutrophil cells on retrieved devices (e.g., capsules) after 14 days in the intraperitoneal space of a suitable test subject, e.g., an immunocompetent mouse. In an embodiment, the FBR is assessed by measuring the levels in the tissue containing the implant of one or more biomarkers of immune response, e.g., cathepsin, TNF-a, IL-13, IL-6, G-CSF, GM-CSF, IL-4, CCL2, or CCL4. In some embodiments, the FBR induced by a device of the invention (e.g., a hydrogel capsule comprising an afibrotic compound disposed on its outer surface), is at least about 80%, about 85%, about 90%, about 95%, about 99%, or about 100% lower than the FBR induced by an FBR-null reference device, e.g., a device that is substantially identical to the test or claimed device except for lacking the means for mitigating the FBR (e.g., a hydrogel capsule that does not comprise an afibrotic compound but is otherwise substantially identical to the claimed capsule. In some embodiments, the FBR (e.g., level of a biomarker(s)) is measured after about 30 minutes, about 1 hour, about 6 hours, about 12 hours, about 1 day, about 2 days, about 3 days, about 4 days, about 1 week, about 2 weeks, about 1 month, about 2 months, about 3 months, about 6 months, or longer.
“Alpha-gal actosidase A”, “a-Gal A“, “alpha-D-galactosidase-A”, alpha-galactoside galactohydrolase”, “galactosidase alpha”, and “GLA protein” may be used interchangeably herein and refer to a homodimeric protein comprising the mature amino acid sequence encoded by a wild- type mammalian GLA gene or an amino acid sequence with conservative substitutions thereof. In an embodiment, the conservatively substituted GLA protein has enzyme activity that is within 80- 120%, 85-115%, 90-110% or 95-105% of the corresponding wild-type mammalian mature GLA protein, as measured by a GLA activity assay described herein. The wild-type human GLA gene encodes a 429-amino acid polypeptide, of which the N-terminal 31 amino acids constitute a signal peptide. The full DNA sequence of the wild-type human GLA gene, including introns and exons, is available in GenBank Accession No. X14448.1. The amino acid sequence for wild-type human precursor a-Gal A is available in GenBank Accession Nos. X14448.1 and U78027 and shown in FIG. 6A (SEQ ID NO:21). In some embodiments, the term “GLA protein” (and any of the aforesaid synonyms) refers to a polypeptide comprising the wild-type mature amino acid sequence shown in FIG. 6 A, and optionally preceded by the GLA signal peptide (underlined in FIG 6A) or by a signal peptide for a different secretory protein, e.g., a protein secreted by human cells (e.g., human epithelial cells), e.g., the signal peptide for HSPG2, as shown in FIG. 6D, which is also referred to herein as a GLA fusion protein.
“Cell,” as used herein, refers to a human cell that is engineered (genetically modified) or a human cell that is not engineered (not genetically modified). In an embodiment, a cell is an immortalized cell, or an engineered cell derived from an immortalized human cell line. In an embodiment, the cell is a live cell, e.g., is viable as measured by any technique described herein or known in the art.
“Cell-binding peptide (CBP)”, as used herein, means a linear or cyclic peptide that comprises an amino acid sequence that is derived from the cell binding domain of a ligand for a cell-adhesion molecule (CAM) (e.g., that mediates cell-matrix junctions or cell-cell junctions). The CBP is less than 50, 4030, 25, 20, 15 or 10 amino acids in length. In an embodiment, the CBP is between 3 and 12 amino acids, 4 and 10 amino acids in length, or is 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 8, 9 or 10 amino acids in length. The CBP amino acid sequence may be identical to the naturally occurring binding domain sequence or may be a conservatively substituted variant thereof. In an embodiment, the CAM ligand is a mammalian protein. In an embodiment, the CAM ligand is a human protein selected from the group of proteins listed in Table 1 below. In an embodiment, the CBP comprises, consists essentially of, or consists of a cell binding sequence listed in Table 1 below or a conservatively substituted variant thereof. In an embodiment, the CBP is an RGD peptide, which means the peptide comprises the amino acid sequence RGD and optionally comprises one or more additional amino acids located at the N-terminus and /or the C-terminus. In an embodiment, the CBP is a cyclic peptide comprising RGD, e.g., one of the cyclic RGD peptides described in Vilaca, H. et ak, Tetrahedron 70 (35):5420-5427 (2014). In an embodiment, the CBP is a linear peptide comprising RGD and is less than 6 amino acids in length. In an embodiment, the CBP is a linear peptide that consists essentially of RGD or RGDSP. Table 1: Exemplary CAM Ligand Proteins and Cell Binding Sequences
Figure imgf000012_0001
“CBP-polymer”, as used herein, means a polymer comprising at least one cell-binding peptide molecule covalently attached to the polymer via a linker. In an embodiment, the polymer in the CBP-polymer is not a peptide or a polypeptide. In an embodiment, the polymer in a CBP- polymer is a synthetic or naturally occurring polysaccharide, e.g., an alginate, e.g., a sodium alginate. In an embodiment, the linker is an amino acid linker (i.e., consists essentially of a single amino acid, or a peptide of several identical or different amino acids), which is joined via a peptide bond to the N-terminus or C-terminus of the CBP. In an embodiment, the C-terminus of an amino acid linker is joined to the N-terminus of the CBP and the N-terminus of the amino acid linker is joined to at least one pendant carboxyl group in the polysaccharide via an amide bond. In an embodiment, the structure of the linker-CBP is expressed as G(i-4)-CBP, meaning that the linker has one, two, three or four glycine residues. In an embodiment, one or more of the monosaccharide moieties in a CBP-polysaccharide, e.g., a CBP-alginate) is not modified with the CBP, e.g, the unmodified moiety has a free carboxyl group or lacks a modifiable pendant carboxyl group. In an embodiment, the number of polysaccharide moieties with a covalently attached CBP is less than any of the following values: 99%, 95%, 90%, 80%, 70%, 60%, 50%, 40% 30%, 20%, 10%, 5%, 1%.
“Cell -binding polypeptide (CBPP)”, as used herein, means a polypeptide of at least 50, at least 75, or at least 100 amino acids in length and comprising the amino acid sequence of a cell binding domain of a CAM ligand, or a conservatively substituted variant thereof. In an embodiment, the CAM ligand is a mammalian protein. In an embodiment, the CBPP amino acid comprises the naturally occurring amino acid sequence of a full-length CAM ligand, e.g., one of the proteins listed in Table 1 below, or a conservatively substituted variant thereof.
“Cell -binding substance (CBS)”, as used herein, means any chemical, biological or other type of substance (e.g., a small organic compound, a peptide, a polypeptide) that is capable of mimicking at least one activity of a ligand for a cell-adhesion molecule (CAM) or other cell- surface molecule that mediates cell-matrix junctions or cell-cell junctions or other receptor- mediated signaling. In an embodiment, when present in a polymer composition encapsulating live cells, the CBS is capable of forming a transient or permanent bond or contact with one or more of the cells. In an embodiment, the CBS facilitates interactions between two or more live cells encapsulated in the polymer composition. In an embodiment, the CBS is physically attached to one or more polymer molecules in the polymer composition. In an embodiment, the CBS is a cell binding peptide or cell-binding polypeptide, as defined herein.
“Conservatively modified variants” or conservative substitution”, as used herein, refers to a variant of a reference peptide or polypeptide that is identical to the reference molecule, except for having one or more conservative amino acid substitutions in its amino acid sequence. In an embodiment, a conservatively modified variant consists of an amino acid sequence that is at least 70%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 97%, 98% or 99% identical to the reference amino acid sequence. A conservative amino acid substitution refers to substitution of an amino acid with an amino acid having similar characteristics (e.g., charge, side-chain size, hydrophobicity/hydrophilicity, backbone conformation and rigidity, etc.) and which has minimal impact on the biological activity of the resulting substituted peptide or polypeptide. Conservative substitution tables of functionally similar amino acids are well known in the art, and exemplary substitutions grouped by functional features are set forth in Table 2 below.
Table 2. Exemplary conservative amino acid substitution groups.
Figure imgf000014_0001
Figure imgf000015_0001
“Consists essentially of’, and variations such as “consist essentially of’ or “consisting essentially of’ as used throughout the specification and claims, indicate the inclusion of any recited elements or group of elements, and the optional inclusion of other elements, of similar or different nature than the recited elements, that do not materially change the basic or novel properties of the specified molecule, composition, device, or method. As a non-limiting example, a cell-binding peptide or an FVIII protein that consists essentially of a recited amino acid sequence may also include one or more amino acids, including substitutions in the recited amino acid sequence, of one or more amino acid residues, which do not materially affect the relevant biological activity of the cell-binding peptide or the FVIII protein, respectively.
“Derived from”, as used herein with respect to a cell or cells, refers to cells obtained from tissue, cell lines, or cells, which optionally are then cultured, passaged, immortalized, differentiated and/or induced, etc. to produce the derived cell(s).
“Device”, as used herein, refers to any implantable object (e.g., a particle, a hydrogel capsule, an implant, a medical device), which contains live, genetically modified human cells (e.g., derived from RPE cells) capable of expressing, and optionally secreting, an exogenous polypeptide following implant of the device, and has a configuration that supports the viability of the cells by allowing cell nutrients to enter the device. In some embodiments, the device allows release from the device of metabolic byproducts generated by the cells.
“Effective amount”, as used herein, refers to an amount of genetically modified cells (e.g., derived from human cells (e.g., epithelial cells)) producing an exogenous polypeptide or a device preparation producing the polypeptide that is sufficient to elicit a desired biological response. In an embodiment, the desired biological response is an increase in levels of the exogenous polypeptide within the cells, or for secreted polypeptides, in a tissue sample removed from a subject treated with (e.g., implanted with) the genetically modified cells, a device or a device preparation containing such cells. As will be appreciated by those of ordinary skill in this art, the effective amount may vary depending on such factors as the desired biological endpoint, the pharmacokinetics of the exogenous polypeptide, composition or device, the condition being treated, the mode of administration, and the age and health of the subject. An effective amount encompasses therapeutic and prophylactic treatment.
An “endogenous nucleic acid” as used herein, is a nucleic acid that occurs naturally in a subject cell.
An “endogenous polypeptide,” as used herein, is a polypeptide that occurs naturally in a subject cell.
“Engineered human cell” and “genetically modified human cell”, may be used interchangeably herein, and each term means a human cell (e.g., an epithelial cell) having a non- naturally occurring genetic alteration (e.g., in the cellular genome), and typically comprises an exogenous nucleic acid sequence (e.g., DNA or RNA) not present (or present at a different level than) in an otherwise similar human cell (e.g., epithelial cell) that is not engineered. In an embodiment, an engineered human cell (e.g., engineered RPE cell) comprises an exogenous nucleic acid encoding a polypeptide, e.g., a therapeutic protein. In an embodiment, the exogenous nucleic acid sequence is chromosomal (e.g., the exogenous nucleic acid sequence is an exogenous sequence disposed in endogenous chromosomal sequence) or is extra chromosomal (e.g., a non- integrated expression vector). In an embodiment, the exogenous nucleic acid sequence comprises an RNA sequence, e.g., an mRNA. In an embodiment, the exogenous nucleic acid sequence comprises a chromosomal or extra-chromosomal exogenous nucleic acid sequence that comprises a sequence which is expressed as RNA, e.g., mRNA or a regulatory RNA. In an embodiment, the exogenous nucleic acid sequence comprises a first chromosomal or extra-chromosomal exogenous nucleic acid sequence that modulates the conformation or expression of a second nucleic acid sequence the second nucleic acid sequence can be exogenous or endogenous. For example, an engineered cell can comprise an exogenous nucleic acid that controls the expression of an endogenous sequence. In an embodiment, the engineered cell comprises an exogenous nucleic acid sequence which comprises a codon optimized coding sequence for a polypeptide of interest and achieves higher expression of the polypeptide than a naturally-occurring coding sequence. The codon optimized coding sequence may be generated using a commercially available algorithm, e.g., GeneOptimizer (ThermoFisher Scientific), OptimumGene™ (GenScript, Piscataway, NJ USA), GeneGPS® (ATUM, Newark, CA USA), or Java Codon Adaptation Tool (JCat, www.jcat.de, Grote, A. et al., Nucleic Acids Research, Vol 33, Issue suppl 2, pp. W526-W531 (2005). In an embodiment, an engineered cell (e.g., engineered epithelial cell, e.g., engineered RPE cell, e.g., engineered ARPE-19 cell) is cultured from a monoclonal cell line. In some embodiments, the engineered cell is not an islet cell, as defined herein.
An “exogenous nucleic acid,” as used herein, is a nucleic acid that does not occur naturally in a subject cell.
An “exogenous polypeptide,” as used herein, is a polypeptide that is encoded by an exogenous nucleic acid in a subject cell. Reference to an amino acid position of a specific sequence means the position of said amino acid in a reference amino acid sequence, e.g., sequence of a full- length mature (after signal peptide cleavage) wild-type protein (unless otherwise stated), and does not exclude the presence of variations, e.g., deletions, insertions and/or substitutions at other positions in the reference amino acid sequence.
“Factor VII protein” or “FVII protein” as used herein, means a polypeptide that comprises the amino acid sequence of a naturally occurring factor VII protein or variant thereof that has a FVII biological activity, e.g., promoting blood clotting, as determined by an art-recognized assay, unless otherwise specified. Naturally occurring FVII exists as a single chain zymogen, a zymogen like two-chain polypeptide and a fully activated two-chain form (FVIIa). In some embodiments, reference to FVII includes single-chain and two-chain forms thereof, including zymogen-like and FVIIa. FVII proteins that may be produced by a genetically modified cell described herein (e.g., derived from a human epithelial cell line, e.g., the ARPE-19 cell line), include wild-type primate (e.g., human), porcine, canine, and murine proteins, as well as variants of such wild-type proteins, including fragments, mutants, variants with one or more amino acid substitutions and / or deletions. In some embodiments, a variant FVII protein is capable of being activated to the fully activated two-chain form (Factor Vila) that has at least 50%, 75%, 90% or more (including >100%) of the activity of wild-type Factor Vila. Variants of FVII and FVIIa are known, e.g., marzeptacog alfa (activated) (MarzAA) and the variants described in European Patent No. 1373493, US Patent No. 7771996, US Patent No. 9476037 and US published application No. US20080058255.
Factor VII biological activity may be quantified by an art recognized assay, unless otherwise specified. For example, FVII biological activity in a sample of a biological fluid, e.g., plasma, may be quantified by (i) measuring the amount of Factor Xa produced in a system comprising tissue factor (TF) embedded in a lipid membrane and Factor X (Persson et ak, ./. Biol. Chem. 272:19919-19924, 1997); (ii) measuring Factor X hydrolysis in an aqueous system; (iii) measuring its physical binding to TF using an instrument based on surface plasmon resonance (Persson, FEBS Letts. 413:359-363, 1997); or (iv) measuring hydrolysis of a synthetic substrate; and/or (v) measuring generation of thrombin in a TF -independent in vitro system. In an embodiment, FVII activity is assessed by a commercially available chromogenic assay (BIOPHEN FVII, HYPHEN BioMed Neuville sur Oise, France), in which the biological sample containing FVII is mixed with thromboplastin calcium, Factor X and SXa-11 (a chromogenic substrate specific for Factor Xa.
“Factor VIII protein” or “FVIII protein” as used herein, means a polypeptide that comprises the amino acid sequence of a naturally occurring factor VIII polypeptide or variant thereof that has an FVIII biological activity, e.g., coagulation activity, as determined by an art-recognized assay, unless otherwise specified. FVIII proteins that may be expressed by a genetically modified cell described herein (e.g., derived from a human epithelial cell line, e.g., the ARPE-19 cell line), include wild-type primate (e.g., human), porcine, canine, and murine proteins, as well as variants of such wild-type proteins, including fragments, mutants, variants with one or more amino acid substitutions and / or deletions, B-domain deletion (BDD) variants, single chain variants and fusions of any of the foregoing wild-type or variants with a half-life extending polypeptide. In an embodiment, the cells are engineered to encode a precursor factor VIII polypeptide (e.g., with the signal sequence) with a full or partial deletion of the B domain. In an embodiment, the cells are engineered to encode a single chain factor VIII polypeptide which contains a variant FVIII protein preferably has at least 50%, 75%, 90% or more (including >100%) of the coagulation activity of the corresponding wild-type factor VIII. Assays for measuring the coagulation activity of FVIII proteins include the one stage or two stage coagulation assay (Rizza et al., 1982, Coagulation assay of FVIIEC and FIXa in Bloom ed. The Hemophelias. NY Churchill Livingston 1992) or the chromogenic substrate FVIIFC assay (Rosen, S. 1984. Scand .1 Haematol 33:139-145, suppl.).
A number of FVIII-BDD variants are known, and include, e.g., variants with the full or partial B-domain deletions disclosed in any of the following U.S. Patent Nos: 4,868,112 (e.g., col. 2, line 2 to col. 19, line 21 and table 2); 5,112,950 (e.g., col. 2, lines 55-68, FIG. 2, and example 1); 5,171,844 (e.g., col. 4, line 22 to col. 5, line 36); 5,543,502 (e.g., col. 2, lines 17-46); 5,595,886; 5,610,278; 5,789,203 (e.g., col. 2, lines 26-51 and examples 5-8); 5,972,885 (e.g., col. 1, lines 25 to col. 2, line 40); 6,048,720 (e.g., col. 6, lines 1-22 and example 1); 6,060,447; 6,228,620; 6,316,226 (e.g., col. 4, line 4 to col. 5, line 28 and examples 1-5); 6,346,513; 6,458,563 (e.g., col. 4, lines 25-53) and 7,041,635 (e.g., col. 2, line 1 to col. 3, line 19, col. 3, line 40 to col. 4, line 67, col. 7, line 43 to col. 8, line 26, and col. 11, line 5 to col. 13, line 39).
In some embodiments, a FVIII-BDD protein produced by a genetically modified cell described herein (e.g., derived from a human epithelial cell line, e.g., the ARPE-19 cell line) has one or more of the following deletions of amino acids in the B-domain: (i) most of the B domain except for amino-terminal B-domain sequences essential for intracellular processing of the primary translation product into two polypeptide chains (WO 91/09122); (ii) a deletion of amino acids 747- 1638 (Hoeben R. C., et al. J. Biol. Chem. 265 (13): 7318-7323 (1990)); amino acids 771-1666 or amino acids 868-1562 (Meulien P., et al. Protein Eng. 2(4):301-6 (1988); amino acids 982-1562 or 760-1639 (Toole et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 83:5939-5942 (1986)); amino acids 797- 1562 (Eaton et al., Biochemistry 25:8343-8347 (1986)); 741-1646 (Kaufman, WO 87/04187)), 747-1560 (Sarver et al., DNA 6:553-564 (1987)); amino acids 741-1648 (Pasek, WO 88/00831)), amino acids 816-1598 or 741-1689 (Lagner (Behring Inst. Mitt. (1988) No 82:16-25, EP 295597); a deletion that includes one or more residues in a furin protease recognition sequence, including any of the specific deletions recited in US Patent No. 9,956,269 at col. 10, line 65 to col. 11, line 36.
In other embodiments, a FVIII-BDD protein retains any of the following B-domain amino acids or amino acid sequences: (i) one or more N-linked glycosylation sites in the B-domain, e.g., residues 757, 784, 828, 900, 963, or optionally 943, first 226 amino acids or first 163 amino acids (Miao, H. Z., et al., Blood 103(a): 3412-3419 (2004), Kasuda, A., et al., J. Thromb. Haemost. 6: 1352-1359 (2008), and Pipe, S. W., et al., J. Thromb. Haemost. 9: 2235-2242 (2011).
In some embodiments, the FVIII-BDD protein is a single-chain variant generated by substitution or deletion of one or more amino acids in the furin protease recognition sequence LKRHQR at amino acids 768-773 in SEQ ID NO: 8 that prevents proteolytic cleavage at this site, including any of the substitutions at the R1645 and/or R1648 positions described in U.S. Patent Nos. 10,023,628, 9,394,353 and 9,670,267.
In some embodiments, any of the above FVIII-BDD proteins may further comprise one or more of the following variations: a F309S substitution to improve expression of the FVIII-BDD protein (Miao, H. Z., et al., Blood 103(a): 3412-3419 (2004); albumin fusions (WO 2011/020866); and Fc fusions (WO 04/101740).
All FVIII-BDD amino acid positions referenced herein refer to the positions in full-length human FVIII, unless otherwise specified. “Factor IX protein” or “FIX protein”, as used herein, means a polypeptide that comprises the amino acid sequence of a naturally occurring factor IX protein or variant thereof that has a FIX biological activity, e.g., coagulation activity, as determined by an art-recognized assay, unless otherwise specified. FIX is produced as an inactive zymogen, which is converted to an active form by factor XIa excision of the activation peptide to produce a heavy chain and a light chain held together by one or more disulfide bonds. FIX proteins that may be produced by a genetically modified described herein (e.g., derived from an RPE cell line, e.g., the ARPE-19 cell line), include wild-type primate (e.g., human), porcine, canine, and murine proteins, as well as variants of such wild-type proteins, including fragments, mutants, variants with one or more amino acid substitutions and / or deletions and fusions of any of the foregoing wild-type or variant proteins with a half-life extending polypeptide. In an embodiment, cells are engineered to encode a full- length wild-type human factor IX polypeptide (e.g., with the signal sequence) or a functional variant thereof. A variant FIX protein preferably has at least 50%, 75%, 90% or more (including >100%) of the coagulation activity of wild-type factor VIX. Assays for measuring the coagulation activity of FIX proteins include the Biophen Factor IX assay (Hyphen BioMed) and the one stage clotting assay (activated partial thromboplastin time (aPTT), e.g., as described in EP 2 032 607, thrombin generation time assay (TGA) and rotational thromboelastometry, e.g., as described in WO 2012/006624.
A number of functional FIX variants are known and may be expressed by engineered cells encapsulated in a device described herein, including any of the functional FIX variants described in the following international patent publications: WO 02/040544 at page 4, lines 9-30 and page
15, lines 6-31; WO 03/020764 in Tables 2 and 3 at pages 14-24, and at page 12, lines 1-27; WO 2007/149406 at page 4, line 1 to page 19, line 11; WO 2007/149406 A2 at page 19, line 12 to page 20, line 9; WO 08/118507 at page 5, line 14 to page 6, line 5; WO 09/051717 at page 9, line 11 to page 20, line 2; WO 09/137254 at page 2, paragraph [006] to page 5, paragraph [011] and page
16, paragraph [044] to page 24, paragraph [057]; WO 09/130198 A2 at page 4, line 26 to page 12, line 6; WO 09/140015 at page 11, paragraph [0043] to page 13, paragraph [0053]; WO 2012/006624; WO 2015/086406.
In certain embodiments, the FIX polypeptide comprises a wild-type or variant sequence fused to a heterologous polypeptide or non-polypeptide moiety extending the half-life of the FIX protein. Exemplary half-life extending moieties include Fc, albumin, a PAS sequence, transferrin, CTP (28 amino acid C-terminal peptide (CTP) of human chorionic gonadotropin (hCG) with its 4 O-glycans), polyethylene glycol (PEG), hydroxy ethyl starch (HES), albumin binding polypeptide, albumin-binding small molecules, or any combination thereof. An exemplary FIX polypeptide is the rFIXFc protein described in WO 2012/006624, which is an FIXFc single chain (FIXFc-sc) and an Fc single chain (Fc-sc) bound together through two disulfide bonds in the hinge region of Fc.
FIX variants also include gain and loss of function variants. An example of a gain of function variant is the “Padua” variant of human FIX, which has a L (leucine) at position 338 of the mature protein instead of an R (arginine) (corresponding to amino acid position 384 of SEQ ID NO: 16), and has greater catalytic and coagulant activity compared to wild-type human FIX (Chang et al., J. Biol. Chem., 273:12089-94 (1998)). An example of a loss of function variant is an alanine substituted for lysine in the fifth amino acid position from the beginning of the mature protein, which results in a protein with reduced binding to collagen IV (e.g., loss of function).
“Islet cell”, as used herein, means a cell that comprises any naturally occurring or any synthetically created, or modified, cell that is intended to recapitulate, mimic or otherwise express, in part or in whole, the functions, in part or in whole, of the cells of the pancreatic islets of Langerhans. The term “islet cell” includes a glucose-responsive, insulin producing cell derived from a stem cell, e.g., from an induced pluripotent stem cell line.
“Polymer composition”, as used herein, is a composition (e.g., a solution, mixture) comprising one or more polymers. As a class, “polymers’ includes homopolymers, heteropolymers, co-polymers, block polymers, block co-polymers and can be both natural and synthetic. Homopolymers contain one type of building block, or monomer, whereas co-polymers contain more than one type of monomer.
“Polypeptide”, as used herein, refers to a polymer comprising amino acid residues linked through peptide bonds and having at least two, and in some embodiments, at least 3, 4, 5, 10, 50, 75,100, 150 or 200 amino acid residues.
“Prevention,” “prevent,” and “preventing” as used herein refers to a treatment that comprises administering a composition (or preparation) of devices encapsulating genetically modified cells that express an exogenous polypeptide, prior to the onset of one or more symptoms of a disease or condition that is amenable to treatment with the exogenous polypeptide, to preclude the physical manifestation of the symptom(s). In some embodiments, “prevention,” “prevent,” and “preventing” require that signs or symptoms of a disease or condition have not yet developed or have not yet been observed.
“RPE cell” as used herein refers to a cell having one or more of the following characteristics: a) it comprises a retinal pigment epithelial cell (RPE) (e.g., cultured using an RPE cell line, e.g., the ARPE-19 cell line (ATCC® CRL-2302™)) or a cell derived or engineered therefrom, e.g., by stably transfecting cells cultured from the ARPE-19 cell line with an exogenous sequence that encodes a polypeptide of interest or inserting the exogenous sequence into one of the specific OCR insertion sites described herein, a cell derived from a primary cell culture of RPE cells, a cell isolated directly (without long term culturing, e.g., less than 5 or 10 passages or rounds of cell division since isolation) from naturally occurring RPE cells, e.g., from a human or other mammal, a cell derived from a transformed, an immortalized, or a long term (e.g., more than 5 or 10 passages or rounds of cell division) RPE cell culture; b) a cell that has been obtained from a less differentiated cell, e.g., a cell developed, programmed, or reprogramed (e.g., in vitro) into an RPE cell or a cell that is, except for any genetic engineering, substantially similar to one or more of a naturally occurring RPE cell or a cell from a primary or long term culture of RPE cells (e.g., the cell can be derived from an IPS cell); or c) a cell that has one or more of the following properties: i) it expresses one or more of the biomarkers CRALBP, RPE-65, RLBP, BEST1, or aB-crystallin; ii) it does not express one or more of the biomarkers CRALBP, RPE-65, RLBP, BEST1, or aB-crystallin; iii) it is naturally found in the retina and forms a monolayer above the choroidal blood vessels in the Bruch’s membrane; or iv) it is responsible for epithelial transport, light absorption, secretion, and immune modulation in the retina; or v) it has been created synthetically, or modified from a naturally occurring cell, to have the same or substantially the same genetic content, and optionally the same or substantially the same epigenetic content, as an immortalized RPE cell line (e.g., the ARPE-19 cell line (ATCC® CRL-2302™)). Other exemplary strains of RPE cells include ARPE-19-SEAP-2-neo cells, RPE-J cells, and hTERT RPE-1 cells. In an embodiment, an RPE described herein is engineered, e.g., to have a new property, e.g., the cell is genetically modified by inserting at least one exogenous transcription unit into one or more of the OCR locations described herein. In other embodiments, an RPE cell is not engineered.
“Sequence identity” or “percent identical”, when used herein to refer to two nucleotide sequences or two amino acid sequences, means the two sequences are the same within a specified region, or have the same nucleotides or amino acids at a specified percentage of nucleotide or amino acid positions within the specified when the two sequences are compared and aligned for maximum correspondence over a comparison window or designated region. Sequence identity may be determined using standard techniques known in the art including, but not limited to, any of the algorithms described in US Patent Application Publication No. 2017/02334455 Al. In an embodiment, the specified percentage of identical nucleotide or amino acid positions is at least about 80%, 85%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99% or higher.
“Spherical” as used herein, mean a device (e.g., a hydrogel capsule or other particle) having a curved surface that forms a sphere (e.g., a completely round ball) or sphere-like shape, which may have waves and undulations, e.g., on the surface. Spheres and sphere-like objects can be mathematically defined by rotation of circles, ellipses, or a combination around each of the three perpendicular axes, a, b, and c. For a sphere, the three axes are the same length. Generally, a sphere-like shape is an ellipsoid (for its averaged surface) with semi -principal axes within 10%, or 5%, or 2.5% of each other. The diameter of a sphere or sphere-like shape is the average diameter, such as the average of the semi-principal axes.
“Spheroid”, as that term is used herein to refer to a device (e.g., a hydrogel capsule or other particle), means the device has (i) a perfect or classical oblate spheroid or prolate spheroid shape or (ii) has a surface that roughly forms a spheroid, e.g., may have waves and undulations and/or may be an ellipsoid (for its averaged surface) with semi-principal axes within 100% of each other.
“Subject” as used herein refers to a human or non-human animal. In an embodiment, the subject is a human (i.e., a male or female) of any age group, e.g., a pediatric human subject (e.g., infant, child, adolescent) or adult human subject (e.g., young adult, middle-aged adult, or senior adult)). In an embodiment, the subject is a non-human animal, for example, a mammal (e.g., a mouse, a dog, a primate (e.g., a cynomolgus monkey or a rhesus monkey). In an embodiment, the subject is a commercially relevant mammal (e.g., cattle, pig, horse, sheep, goat, cat, or dog) or a bird (e.g., a commercially relevant bird such as a chicken, duck, goose, or turkey). In certain embodiments, the animal is a mammal. The animal may be a male or female and at any stage of development. A non-human animal may be a transgenic animal.
“Transcription unit” means a DNA sequence, e.g., present in an exogenous nucleic acid, that comprises at least a promoter sequence operably linked to a coding sequence, and may also comprise one or more additional elements that control or enhance transcription of the coding sequence into RNA molecules or translation of the RNA molecules into polypeptide molecules. In some embodiments, a transcription unit also comprises a poiyadenylation (poly A) signal sequence and poly A site. In an embodiment, a transcription unit is present as an exogenous sequence integrated in one or more of the specific OCR insertion locations described herein.
“Treatment,” “treat,” and “treating” as used herein refers to one or more of reducing, reversing, alleviating, delaying the onset of, or inhibiting the progress of one or more of a symptom, manifestation, or underlying cause, of a disease (e.g., hemophilia A). In an embodiment, treating comprises reducing, reversing, alleviating, delaying the onset of, or inhibiting the progress of a symptom or condition associated with the disease. In an embodiment, treating comprises increasing levels of a therapeutic polypeptide in at least one tissue of a subject in need thereof, e.g., in one or more of plasma, liver, kidney and heart. In some embodiments, “treatment,” “treat,” and “treating” require that signs or symptoms associated with the disease or condition have developed or have been observed. In other embodiments, treatment may be administered in the absence of signs or symptoms of the disease or condition, e.g., in preventive treatment. For example, treatment may be administered to a susceptible individual prior to the onset of symptoms (e.g., due to a history of symptoms and/or genetic or other susceptibility factors). Treatment may also be continued after symptoms have resolved, for example, to delay or prevent recurrence. In some embodiments, treatment comprises prevention and in other embodiments it does not.
Selected Chemical Definitions
Definitions of specific functional groups and chemical terms are described in more detail below. The chemical elements are identified in accordance with the Periodic Table of the Elements, CAS version, Handbook of Chemistry and Physics , 75th Ed., inside cover, and specific functional groups are generally defined as described therein. Additionally, general principles of organic chemistry, as well as specific functional moieties and reactivity, are described in Thomas Sorrell, Organic Chemistry , University Science Books, Sausalito, 1999; Smith and March, March ’s Advanced Organic Chemistry , 5th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 2001; Larock, Comprehensive Organic Transformations , VCH Publishers, Inc., New York, 1989; and Carruthers, Some Modern Methods of Organic Synthesis , 3rd Edition, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, 1987.
The abbreviations used herein have their conventional meaning within the chemical and biological arts. The chemical structures and formulae set forth herein are constructed according to the standard rules of chemical valency known in the chemical arts. When a range of values is listed, it is intended to encompass each value and sub-range within the range. For example, “C1-C6 alkyl” is intended to encompass, Ci, C2, C3, C4, C5, C , Ci- Ce, C1-C5, C1-C4, C1-C3, C1-C2, C2-C6, C2-C5, C2-C4, C2-C3, C3-C6, C3-C5, C3-C4, C4-C6, C4-C5, and C5-C6 alkyl.
As used herein, “alkyl” refers to a radical of a straight-chain or branched saturated hydrocarbon group having from 1 to 24 carbon atoms (“C1-C24 alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 12 carbon atoms (“C1-C12 alkyl”), 1 to 10 carbon atoms (“C1-C10 alkyl”), 1 to 8 carbon atoms (“Ci-Cs alkyl”), 1 to 6 carbon atoms (“C1-C6 alkyl”), 1 to 5 carbon atoms (“C1-C5 alkyl”), 1 to 4 carbon atoms (“Ci-C4alkyl”), 1 to 3 carbon atoms (“C1-C3 alkyl”), 1 to 2 carbon atoms (“C1-C2 alkyl”), or 1 carbon atom (“Ci alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 2 to 6 carbon atoms (“C2-C6 alkyl”). Examples of C1-C6 alkyl groups include methyl (Ci), ethyl (C2), n-propyl (C3), isopropyl (C3), n-butyl (C4), tert-butyl (C4), sec-butyl (C4), iso-butyl (C4), n- pentyl (C5), 3-pentanyl (C5), amyl (C5), neopentyl (C5), 3-methyl-2-butanyl (C5), tertiary amyl (C5), and n-hexyl (Cr,). Additional examples of alkyl groups include n-heptyl (C7), n-octyl (Cx) and the like. Each instance of an alkyl group may be independently optionally substituted, i.e., unsubstituted (an “unsubstituted alkyl”) or substituted (a “substituted alkyl”) with one or more substituents; e.g., for instance from 1 to 5 substituents, 1 to 3 substituents, or 1 substituent.
As used herein, “alkenyl” refers to a radical of a straight-chain or branched hydrocarbon group having from 2 to 24 carbon atoms, one or more carbon-carbon double bonds, and no triple bonds (“C2-C24 alkenyl”). In some embodiments, an alkenyl group has 2 to 12 carbon atoms (“C2- C12 alkenyl”), 2 to 10 carbon atoms (“C2-C10 alkenyl”), 2 to 8 carbon atoms (“C2-C8 alkenyl”), 2 to 6 carbon atoms (“C2-C6 alkenyl”), 2 to 5 carbon atoms (“C2-C5 alkenyl”), 2 to 4 carbon atoms (“C2-C4 alkenyl”), 2 to 3 carbon atoms (“C2-C3 alkenyl”), or 2 carbon atoms (“C2 alkenyl”). The one or more carbon-carbon double bonds can be internal (such as in 2-butenyl) or terminal (such as in 1-butenyl). Examples of C2-C4 alkenyl groups include ethenyl (C2), 1-propenyl (C3), 2- propenyl (C3), 1-butenyl (C4), 2-butenyl (C4), butadienyl (C4), and the like. Examples of C2-C6 alkenyl groups include the aforementioned C2-4 alkenyl groups as well as pentenyl (C5), pentadienyl (C5), hexenyl (Cr,), and the like. Each instance of an alkenyl group may be independently optionally substituted, i.e., unsubstituted (an “unsubstituted alkenyl”) or substituted (a “substituted alkenyl”) with one or more substituents e.g., for instance from 1 to 5 substituents, 1 to 3 substituents, or 1 substituent. As used herein, the term “alkynyl” refers to a radical of a straight-chain or branched hydrocarbon group having from 2 to 24 carbon atoms, one or more carbon-carbon triple bonds (“C2-C24 alkenyl”). In some embodiments, an alkynyl group has 2 to 12 carbon atoms (“C2-C12 alkynyl”), 2 to 10 carbon atoms (“C2-C10 alkynyl”), 2 to 8 carbon atoms (“C2-C8 alkynyl”), 2 to 6 carbon atoms (“C2-C6 alkynyl”), 2 to 5 carbon atoms (“C2-C5 alkynyl”), 2 to 4 carbon atoms (“C2- C4 alkynyl”), 2 to 3 carbon atoms (“C2-C3 alkynyl”), or 2 carbon atoms (“C2 alkynyl”). The one or more carbon-carbon triple bonds can be internal (such as in 2-butynyl) or terminal (such as in 1- butynyl). Examples of C2-C4 alkynyl groups include ethynyl (C2), 1-propynyl (C3), 2-propynyl (C3), 1-butynyl (C4), 2-butynyl (C4), and the like. Each instance of an alkynyl group may be independently optionally substituted, i.e., unsubstituted (an “unsubstituted alkynyl”) or substituted (a “substituted alkynyl”) with one or more substituents e.g., for instance from 1 to 5 substituents, 1 to 3 substituents, or 1 substituent.
As used herein, the term "heteroalkyl," refers to a non-cyclic stable straight or branched chain, or combinations thereof, including at least one carbon atom and at least one heteroatom selected from the group consisting of O, N, P, Si, and S, and wherein the nitrogen and sulfur atoms may optionally be oxidized, and the nitrogen heteroatom may optionally be quatemized. The heteroatom(s) O, N, P, S, and Si may be placed at any position of the heteroalkyl group. Exemplary heteroalkyl groups include, but are not limited to: -CH2-CH2-O-CH3, -CH2-CH2-NH-CH3, -CEh- CH2-N(CH3)-CH3, -CH2-S-CH2-CH3, -CH2-CH2, -S(0)-CH , -CH2-CH2-S(0)2-CH3, -CH=CH-O- CH3, -Si(CH )3, -CH2-CH=N-OCH , -CH=CH-N(CH )-CH3, -O-CH3, and -O-CH2-CH3. Up to two or three heteroatoms may be consecutive, such as, for example, -CH2-NH-OCH3 and -CH2-O- Si(CH3)3. Where "heteroalkyl" is recited, followed by recitations of specific heteroalkyl groups, such as -CH2O, -NRCRd, or the like, it will be understood that the terms heteroalkyl and -CH2O or -NRCRD are not redundant or mutually exclusive. Rather, the specific heteroalkyl groups are recited to add clarity. Thus, the term "heteroalkyl" should not be interpreted herein as excluding specific heteroalkyl groups, such as -CH2O, -NRCRU, or the like. Each instance of a heteroalkyl group may be independently optionally substituted, i.e., unsubstituted (an “unsubstituted heteroalkyl”) or substituted (a “substituted heteroalkyl”) with one or more substituents e.g, for instance from 1 to 5 substituents, 1 to 3 substituents, or 1 substituent.
The terms "alkylene," “alkenylene,” “alkynylene,” or “heteroalkylene,” alone or as part of another substituent, mean, unless otherwise stated, a divalent radical derived from an alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, or heteroalkyl, respectively. An alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene, or heteroalkylene group may be described as, e.g., a Ci-C6-membered alkylene, C2-C6-membered alkenylene, Ci-C6-membered alkynylene, or Ci-C6-membered heteroalkylene, wherein the term “membered” refers to the non-hydrogen atoms within the moiety. In the case of heteroalkylene groups, heteroatoms can also occupy either or both chain termini (e.g., alkyleneoxy, alkylenedioxy, alkyleneamino, alkylenediamino, and the like). Still further, for alkylene and heteroalkylene linking groups, no orientation of the linking group is implied by the direction in which the formula of the linking group is written. For example, the formula -C(0)2R’- may represent both -C(0)2R’- and -R’C(0)2-.
As used herein, “aryl” refers to a radical of a monocyclic or polycyclic (e.g., bicyclic or tricyclic) 4n+2 aromatic ring system (e.g, having 6, 10, or 14 p electrons shared in a cyclic array) having 6-14 ring carbon atoms and zero heteroatoms provided in the aromatic ring system (“C6- Ci4 aryl”). In some embodiments, an aryl group has six ring carbon atoms (“C6 aryl”; e.g, phenyl). In some embodiments, an aryl group has ten ring carbon atoms (“Cio aryl”; e.g, naphthyl such as 1-naphthyl and 2-naphthyl). In some embodiments, an aryl group has fourteen ring carbon atoms (“Ci4 aryl”; e.g, anthracyl). An aryl group may be described as, e.g., a C6-Cio-membered aryl, wherein the term “membered” refers to the non-hydrogen ring atoms within the moiety. Aryl groups include phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, and tetrahydronaphthyl. Each instance of an aryl group may be independently optionally substituted, i.e., unsubstituted (an “unsubstituted aryl”) or substituted (a “substituted aryl”) with one or more substituents.
As used herein, “heteroaryl” refers to a radical of a 5-10 membered monocyclic or bicyclic 4n+2 aromatic ring system (e.g, having 6 or 10 p electrons shared in a cyclic array) having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms provided in the aromatic ring system, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur (“5-10 membered heteroaryl”). In heteroaryl groups that contain one or more nitrogen atoms, the point of attachment can be a carbon or nitrogen atom, as valency permits. Heteroaryl bicyclic ring systems can include one or more heteroatoms in one or both rings. “Heteroaryl” also includes ring systems wherein the heteroaryl ring, as defined above, is fused with one or more aryl groups wherein the point of attachment is either on the aryl or heteroaryl ring, and in such instances, the number of ring members designates the number of ring members in the fused (aryl/heteroaryl) ring system. Bicyclic heteroaryl groups wherein one ring does not contain a heteroatom (e.g, indolyl, quinolinyl, carbazolyl, and the like) the point of attachment can be on either ring, i.e., either the ring bearing a heteroatom ( e.g 2-indolyl) or the ring that does not contain a heteroatom (e.g, 5- indolyl). A heteroaryl group may be described as, e.g., a 6-10-membered heteroaryl, wherein the term “membered” refers to the non-hydrogen ring atoms within the moiety.
In some embodiments, a heteroaryl group is a 5-10 membered aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms provided in the aromatic ring system, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur (“5-10 membered heteroaryl”). In some embodiments, a heteroaryl group is a 5-8 membered aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms provided in the aromatic ring system, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur (“5-8 membered heteroaryl”). In some embodiments, a heteroaryl group is a 5-6 membered aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms provided in the aromatic ring system, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur (“5-6 membered heteroaryl”). In some embodiments, the 5-6 membered heteroaryl has 1-3 ring heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur. In some embodiments, the 5-6 membered heteroaryl has 1-2 ring heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur. In some embodiments, the 5-6 membered heteroaryl has 1 ring heteroatom selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur. Each instance of a heteroaryl group may be independently optionally substituted, i.e., unsubstituted (an “unsubstituted heteroaryl”) or substituted (a “substituted heteroaryl”) with one or more substituents.
Exemplary 5-membered heteroaryl groups containing one heteroatom include, without limitation, pyrrolyl, furanyl and thiophenyl. Exemplary 5-membered heteroaryl groups containing two heteroatoms include, without limitation, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, and isothiazolyl. Exemplary 5-membered heteroaryl groups containing three heteroatoms include, without limitation, triazolyl, oxadiazolyl, and thiadiazolyl. Exemplary 5-membered heteroaryl groups containing four heteroatoms include, without limitation, tetrazolyl. Exemplary 6- membered heteroaryl groups containing one heteroatom include, without limitation, pyridinyl. Exemplary 6-membered heteroaryl groups containing two heteroatoms include, without limitation, pyridazinyl, pyrimidinyl, and pyrazinyl. Exemplary 6-membered heteroaryl groups containing three or four heteroatoms include, without limitation, triazinyl and tetrazinyl, respectively. Exemplary 7-membered heteroaryl groups containing one heteroatom include, without limitation, azepinyl, oxepinyl, and thiepinyl. Exemplary 5,6-bicyclic heteroaryl groups include, without limitation, indolyl, isoindolyl, indazolyl, benzotriazolyl, benzothiophenyl, isobenzothiophenyl, benzofuranyl, benzoisofuranyl, benzimidazolyl, benzoxazolyl, benzisoxazolyl, benzoxadiazolyl, benzthiazolyl, benzisothiazolyl, benzthiadiazolyl, indolizinyl, and purinyl. Exemplary 6,6-bicyclic heteroaryl groups include, without limitation, naphthyridinyl, pteridinyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, cinnolinyl, quinoxalinyl, phthalazinyl, and quinazolinyl. Other exemplary heteroaryl groups include heme and heme derivatives.
As used herein, the terms "arylene" and " heteroaryl ene," alone or as part of another substituent, mean a divalent radical derived from an aryl and heteroaryl, respectively.
As used herein, “cycloalkyl” refers to a radical of a non-aromatic cyclic hydrocarbon group having from 3 to 10 ring carbon atoms (“C3-C10 cycloalkyl”) and zero heteroatoms in the non aromatic ring system. In some embodiments, a cycloalkyl group has 3 to 8 ring carbon atoms (“C3- C8cycloalkyl”), 3 to 6 ring carbon atoms (“C3-C6 cycloalkyl”), or 5 to 10 ring carbon atoms (“C5- C10 cycloalkyl”). A cycloalkyl group may be described as, e.g., a C4-C7-membered cycloalkyl, wherein the term “membered” refers to the non-hydrogen ring atoms within the moiety. Exemplary C3-C6 cycloalkyl groups include, without limitation, cyclopropyl (C3), cyclopropenyl (C3), cyclobutyl (C4), cyclobutenyl (C4), cyclopentyl (C5), cyclopentenyl (C5), cyclohexyl (Cr,), cyclohexenyl (Ce), cyclohexadienyl (Ce), and the like. Exemplary C3-C8 cycloalkyl groups include, without limitation, the aforementioned C3-C6 cycloalkyl groups as well as cycloheptyl (C7), cycloheptenyl (C7), cycloheptadienyl (C7), cycloheptatrienyl (C7), cyclooctyl (Cs), cyclooctenyl (Cs), cubanyl (Cs), bicyclo[l.l.l]pentanyl (C5), bicyclo[2.2.2]octanyl (Cs), bicyclo[2.1.1]hexanyl (Ce), bicyclo[3.1.1]heptanyl (C7), and the like. Exemplary C3-C10 cycloalkyl groups include, without limitation, the aforementioned C3-C8 cycloalkyl groups as well as cyclononyl (C9), cyclononenyl (C9), cyclodecyl (C10), cyclodecenyl (C10), octahy dro- 1 //-i ndeny 1 (C9), decahydronaphthalenyl (C10), spiro [4.5] decanyl (C10), and the like. As the foregoing examples illustrate, in certain embodiments, the cycloalkyl group is either monocyclic (“monocyclic cycloalkyl”) or contain a fused, bridged or spiro ring system such as a bicyclic system (“bicyclic cycloalkyl”) and can be saturated or can be partially unsaturated. “Cycloalkyl” also includes ring systems wherein the cycloalkyl ring, as defined above, is fused with one or more aryl groups wherein the point of attachment is on the cycloalkyl ring, and in such instances, the number of carbons continue to designate the number of carbons in the cycloalkyl ring system. Each instance of a cycloalkyl group may be independently optionally substituted, i.e., unsubstituted (an “unsubstituted cycloalkyl”) or substituted (a “substituted cycloalkyl”) with one or more substituents.
“Heterocyclyl” as used herein refers to a radical of a 3- to 10-membered non-aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1 to 4 ring heteroatoms, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, boron, phosphorus, and silicon (“3-10 membered heterocyclyl”). In heterocyclyl groups that contain one or more nitrogen atoms, the point of attachment can be a carbon or nitrogen atom, as valency permits. A heterocyclyl group can either be monocyclic (“monocyclic heterocyclyl”) or a fused, bridged or spiro ring system such as a bicyclic system (“bicyclic heterocyclyl”), and can be saturated or can be partially unsaturated. Heterocyclyl bicyclic ring systems can include one or more heteroatoms in one or both rings. “Heterocyclyl” also includes ring systems wherein the heterocyclyl ring, as defined above, is fused with one or more cycloalkyl groups wherein the point of attachment is either on the cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl ring, or ring systems wherein the heterocyclyl ring, as defined above, is fused with one or more aryl or heteroaryl groups, wherein the point of attachment is on the heterocyclyl ring, and in such instances, the number of ring members continue to designate the number of ring members in the heterocyclyl ring system. A heterocyclyl group may be described as, e.g., a 3-7-membered heterocyclyl, wherein the term “membered” refers to the non-hydrogen ring atoms, i.e., carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, boron, phosphorus, and silicon, within the moiety. Each instance of heterocyclyl may be independently optionally substituted, i.e., unsubstituted (an “unsubstituted heterocyclyl”) or substituted (a “substituted heterocyclyl”) with one or more substituents. In certain embodiments, the heterocyclyl group is unsubstituted 3-10 membered heterocyclyl. In certain embodiments, the heterocyclyl group is substituted 3-10 membered heterocyclyl.
In some embodiments, a heterocyclyl group is a 5-10 membered non-aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, boron, phosphorus, and silicon (“5-10 membered heterocyclyl”). In some embodiments, a heterocyclyl group is a 5-8 membered non-aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur (“5-8 membered heterocyclyl”). In some embodiments, a heterocyclyl group is a 5-6 membered non-aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur (“5-6 membered heterocyclyl”). In some embodiments, the 5-6 membered heterocyclyl has 1-3 ring heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur. In some embodiments, the 5-6 membered heterocyclyl has 1-2 ring heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur. In some embodiments, the 5-6 membered heterocyclyl has one ring heteroatom selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur.
Exemplary 3-membered heterocyclyl groups containing one heteroatom include, without limitation, azirdinyl, oxiranyl, thiorenyl. Exemplary 4-membered heterocyclyl groups containing one heteroatom include, without limitation, azetidinyl, oxetanyl and thietanyl. Exemplary 5- membered heterocyclyl groups containing one heteroatom include, without limitation, tetrahydrofuranyl, dihydrofuranyl, tetrahydrothiophenyl, dihydrothiophenyl, pyrrolidinyl, dihydropyrrolyl and pyrrolyl-2,5-dione. Exemplary 5-membered heterocyclyl groups containing two heteroatoms include, without limitation, dioxolanyl, oxasulfuranyl, disulfuranyl, and oxazolidin-2-one. Exemplary 5-membered heterocyclyl groups containing three heteroatoms include, without limitation, triazolinyl, oxadiazolinyl, and thiadiazolinyl. Exemplary 6-membered heterocyclyl groups containing one heteroatom include, without limitation, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, tetrahydropyranyl, dihydropyridinyl, and thianyl. Exemplary 6-membered heterocyclyl groups containing two heteroatoms include, without limitation, piperazinyl, morpholinyl, dithianyl, dioxanyl. Exemplary 6-membered heterocyclyl groups containing two heteroatoms include, without limitation, triazinanyl or thiomorpholinyl- 1 , 1 -dioxide. Exemplary 7- membered heterocyclyl groups containing one heteroatom include, without limitation, azepanyl, oxepanyl and thiepanyl. Exemplary 8-membered heterocyclyl groups containing one heteroatom include, without limitation, azocanyl, oxecanyl and thiocanyl. Exemplary 5-membered heterocyclyl groups fused to a C6 aryl ring (also referred to herein as a 5,6-bicyclic heterocyclic ring) include, without limitation, indolinyl, isoindolinyl, dihydrobenzofuranyl, dihydrobenzothienyl, benzoxazolinonyl, and the like. Exemplary 6-membered heterocyclyl groups fused to an aryl ring (also referred to herein as a 6,6-bicyclic heterocyclic ring) include, without limitation, tetrahydroquinolinyl, tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, and the like.
“Amino” as used herein refers to the radical -NR70R71, wherein R70 and R71 are each independently hydrogen, Ci-Cx alkyl, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, C4-C10 heterocyclyl, C6-C10 aryl, and C5-C10 heteroaryl. In some embodiments, amino refers to NEh. As used herein, “cyano” refers to the radical -CN.
As used herein, “halo” or “halogen,” independently or as part of another substituent, mean, unless otherwise stated, a fluorine (F), chlorine (Cl), bromine (Br), or iodine (I) atom.
As used herein, “hydroxy” refers to the radical -OH.
Alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl groups, as defined herein, are optionally substituted ( e.g ., “substituted” or “unsubstituted” alkyl, “substituted” or “unsubstituted” alkenyl, “substituted” or “unsubstituted” alkynyl, “substituted” or “unsubstituted” heteroalkyl, “substituted” or “unsubstituted” cycloalkyl, “substituted” or “unsubstituted” heterocyclyl, “substituted” or “unsubstituted” aryl or “substituted” or “unsubstituted” heteroaryl group). In general, the term “substituted”, whether preceded by the term “optionally” or not, means that at least one hydrogen present on a group (e.g., a carbon or nitrogen atom) is replaced with a permissible substituent, e.g, a substituent which upon substitution results in a stable compound, e.g, a compound which does not spontaneously undergo transformation such as by rearrangement, cyclization, elimination, or other reaction. Unless otherwise indicated, a “substituted” group has a substituent at one or more substitutable positions of the group, and when more than one position in any given structure is substituted, the substituent is either the same or different at each position. The term “substituted” is contemplated to include substitution with all permissible substituents of organic compounds, such as any of the substituents described herein that result in the formation of a stable compound. The present disclosure contemplates any and all such combinations to arrive at a stable compound. For purposes of this disclosure, heteroatoms such as nitrogen may have hydrogen substituents and/or any suitable substituent as described herein which satisfy the valencies of the heteroatoms and results in the formation of a stable moiety.
Two or more substituents may optionally be joined to form aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, or heterocyclyl groups. Such so-called ring-forming substituents are typically, though not necessarily, found attached to a cyclic base structure. In one embodiment, the ring-forming substituents are attached to adjacent members of the base structure. For example, two ring-forming substituents attached to adjacent members of a cyclic base structure create a fused ring structure. In another embodiment, the ring-forming substituents are attached to a single member of the base structure. For example, two ring-forming substituents attached to a single member of a cyclic base structure create a spirocyclic structure. In yet another embodiment, the ring-forming substituents are attached to non-adjacent members of the base structure.
Compounds of Formula (I) described herein can comprise one or more asymmetric centers, and thus can exist in various isomeric forms, e.g., enantiomers and/or diastereomers. For example, the compounds described herein can be in the form of an individual enantiomer, diastereomer or geometric isomer, or can be in the form of a mixture of stereoisomers, including racemic mixtures and mixtures enriched in one or more stereoisomer. Isomers can be isolated from mixtures by methods known to those skilled in the art, including chiral high-pressure liquid chromatography (HPLC) and the formation and crystallization of chiral salts; or preferred isomers can be prepared by asymmetric syntheses. See, for example, Jacques et al., Enantiomers, Racemates and Resolutions (Wiley Interscience, New York, 1981); Wilen et al. , Tetrahedron 33:2725 (1977); Eliel, Stereochemistry of Carbon Compounds (McGraw-Hill, NY, 1962); and Wilen, Tables of Resolving Agents and Optical Resolutions p. 268 (E.L. Eliel, Ed., Univ. of Notre Dame Press, Notre Dame, IN 1972). The disclosure additionally encompasses compounds described herein as individual isomers substantially free of other isomers, and alternatively, as mixtures of various isomers.
As used herein, a pure enantiomeric compound is substantially free from other enantiomers or stereoisomers of the compound (i.e., in enantiomeric excess). In other words, an “S” form of the compound is substantially free from the “R” form of the compound and is, thus, in enantiomeric excess of the “R” form. The term “enantiomerically pure” or “pure enantiomer” denotes that the compound comprises more than 75% by weight, more than 80% by weight, more than 85% by weight, more than 90% by weight, more than 91% by weight, more than 92% by weight, more than 93% by weight, more than 94% by weight, more than 95% by weight, more than 96% by weight, more than 97% by weight, more than 98% by weight, more than 99% by weight, more than 99.5% by weight, or more than 99.9% by weight, of the enantiomer. In certain embodiments, the weights are based upon total weight of all enantiomers or stereoisomers of the compound.
Compounds of Formula (I) described herein may also comprise one or more isotopic substitutions. For example, H may be in any isotopic form, including ¾, 2H (D or deuterium), and 3H (T or tritium); C may be in any isotopic form, including 12C, 13C, and 14C; O may be in any isotopic form, including 160 and 180; and the like. The term "pharmaceutically acceptable salt" is meant to include salts of the active compounds that are prepared with relatively nontoxic acids or bases, depending on the particular substituents found on the compounds described herein. When compounds of Formula (I) used to prepare devices of the present disclosure contain relatively acidic functionalities, base addition salts can be obtained by contacting the neutral form of such compounds with a sufficient amount of the desired base, either neat or in a suitable inert solvent. Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable base addition salts include sodium, potassium, calcium, ammonium, organic amino, or magnesium salt, or a similar salt. When compounds used in the present disclosure contain relatively basic functionalities, acid addition salts can be obtained by contacting the neutral form of such compounds with a sufficient amount of the desired acid, either neat or in a suitable inert solvent. Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts include those derived from inorganic acids like hydrochloric, hydrobromic, nitric, carbonic, monohydrogencarbonic, phosphoric, monohydrogenphosphoric, dihydrogenphosphoric, sulfuric, monohydrogensulfuric, hydriodic, or phosphorous acids and the like, as well as the salts derived from organic acids like acetic, propionic, isobutyric, maleic, malonic, benzoic, succinic, suberic, fumaric, lactic, mandelic, phthalic, benzenesulfonic, p-tolylsulfonic, citric, tartaric, methanesulfonic, and the like. Also included are salts of amino acids such as arginate and the like, and salts of organic acids like glucuronic or galacturonic acids and the like (see, e.g., Berge et al, Journal of Pharmaceutical Science 66: 1-19 (1977)). Certain specific compounds used in the devices of the present disclosure (e.g., a particle, a hydrogel capsule) contain both basic and acidic functionalities that allow the compounds to be converted into either base or acid addition salts. These salts may be prepared by methods known to those skilled in the art. Other pharmaceutically acceptable carriers known to those of skill in the art are suitable for use in the present disclosure.
Devices of the present disclosure may contain a compound of Formula (I) in a prodrug form. Prodrugs are those compounds that readily undergo chemical changes under physiological conditions to provide the compounds useful to mitigate the FBR to devices of the present disclosure. Additionally, prodrugs can be converted to useful compounds of Formula (I) by chemical or biochemical methods in an ex vivo environment.
Certain compounds of Formula (I) described herein can exist in unsolvated forms as well as solvated forms, including hydrated forms. In general, the solvated forms are equivalent to unsolvated forms and are encompassed within the scope of the present disclosure. Certain compounds of Formula (I) described herein may exist in multiple crystalline or amorphous forms. In general, all physical forms are equivalent for the uses contemplated by the present disclosure and are intended to be within the scope of the present disclosure.
The term “solvate” refers to forms of the compound that are associated with a solvent, usually by a solvolysis reaction. This physical association may include hydrogen bonding. Conventional solvents include water, methanol, ethanol, acetic acid, DMSO, THF, diethyl ether, and the like. The compounds described herein may be prepared, e.g ., in crystalline form, and may be solvated. Suitable solvates include pharmaceutically acceptable solvates and further include both stoichiometric solvates and non-stoichiometric solvates.
The term “hydrate” refers to a compound which is associated with water. Typically, the number of the water molecules contained in a hydrate of a compound is in a definite ratio to the number of the compound molecules in the hydrate. Therefore, a hydrate of a compound may be represented, for example, by the general formula R x FhO, wherein R is the compound and wherein x is a number greater than 0.
The term “tautomer” as used herein refers to compounds that are interchangeable forms of a compound structure, and that vary in the displacement of hydrogen atoms and electrons. Thus, two structures may be in equilibrium through the movement of p electrons and an atom (usually H). For example, ends and ketones are tautomers because they are rapidly interconverted by treatment with either acid or base. Tautomeric forms may be relevant to the attainment of the optimal chemical reactivity and biological activity of a compound of interest.
The symbol “ as used herein refers to a connection to an entity, e.g., a polymer (e.g., hydrogel-forming polymer such as alginate) or surface of an implantable element (e.g., a particle, device (e.g., a hydrogel capsule) or material). The connection represented by “ ” may refer to direct attachment to the entity, e.g., a polymer or an implantable element (e.g., a device), or may refer to linkage to the entity through an attachment group. An “attachment group,” as described herein, refers to a moiety for linkage of a compound of Formula (I) to an entity (e.g., a polymer or an implantable element as described herein), and may comprise any attachment chemistry known in the art. A listing of exemplary attachment groups is outlined in Bioconjugate Techniques (3rd ed, Greg T. Hermanson, Waltham, MA: Elsevier, Inc, 2013), which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. In some embodiments, an attachment group comprises alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, -C(O)-, -OC(O)-, -N(RC)-, - N(Rc)C(0)-, -C(0)N(Rc)-, -N(RC)N(R°)- -NCN-, -C(=N(Rc)(RD))0-, -S-, -S(0)x-, - 0S(0)x-, -N(Rc)S(0)x- -S(0)xN(Rc)-, -P(RF)y- -Si(ORA)2 -, -Si(RG)(ORA)-, -B(ORA)-, or a metal, wherein each of RA, Rc, R°, RF, R°, x and y is independently as described herein. In some embodiments, an attachment group comprises an amine, ketone, ester, amide, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, or thiol. In some embodiments, an attachment group is a cross-linker. In some embodiments, the attachment group is -C(0)(Ci-C6-alkylene)-, wherein alkylene is substituted with R1, and R1 is as described herein. In some embodiments, the attachment group is -C(0)(Ci- C6-alkylene)-, wherein alkylene is substituted with 1-2 alkyl groups (e.g., 1-2 methyl groups). In some embodiments, the attachment group is -C(0)C(CH3)2-. In some embodiments, the attachment group is -C(0)(methylene)-, wherein alkylene is substituted with 1-2 alkyl groups (e.g., 1-2 methyl groups). In some embodiments, the attachment group is -C(0)CH(CH3)-. In some embodiments, the attachment group is -C(0)C(CH3)-.
OCR Insertion Sites and Exogenous Transcription Units
The genetically modified cells (e.g., genetically modified human RPE cells) of the present disclosure comprises at least one exogenous transcription unit stably integrated into one or more of four target OCRs in the genome: an OCR on Chr 2, an OCR on Chr 5, an OCR on Chr 8, and an OCR on Chr 12. The 5’ and 3’ boundaries of a target OCR may be defined in relation to: (i) a human reference genome sequence assembly, e.g., the GRCh37 assembly (also known as hgl9) or the GRCh38.pl3 assembly (also known as hg38) in Ensembl, which assemblies are based at the European Molecular Biology Laboratory’s European Bioinformatics Institute (EMBI-EBI) (Cambridge, United Kingdom) (available at the following Ensembl webpages: grch37.ensembl.org and useast.ensembl.org/Homo_sapiens/Info/Index) and / or (ii) the OCR nucleotide sequence recited in SEQ ID NO: 1 (for the Chr 2 OCR), SEQ ID N0:2 (for the Chr 5 OCR), SEQ ID NO:26 (for the Chr 8 OCR) or SEQ ID N0:3 (for the Chr 12 OCR).
In an embodiment, the exogenous transcription unit is inserted in the target genomic OCR(s) of the genetically modified cell anywhere between the two nucleotide positions that define the 5’ and 3’ boundaries of the target OCR(s), e.g., between two nucleotide positions that correspond to the first and last nucleotides of SEQ ID N0:1, SEQ ID N0:2, SEQ ID NO:26, or SEQ ID N0:3. In an embodiment, the corresponding nucleotide positions in a target OCR or insertion site are in a nucleotide sequence that shares at least 90% sequence identity with SEQ ID N0:1, SEQ ID N0:2, SEQ ID NO:26 or SEQ ID N0:3. In an embodiment, the shared sequence identity of a target OCR in the cell line and the corresponding Chr 2 OCR sequence, Chr 5 OCR sequence, Chr 8 OCR sequence or Chr 12 OCR sequence recited herein is 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99% or greater. These sequences may be used in combination with a targeted genome editing technique to insert the transcription unit into a human cell, e.g., an epithelial cell, at a desired site(s) in the target OCR(s), e.g., on Chr 2, Chr 5, Chr 8 and / or Chr 12. The targeted genome editing technique may be any technique known in the art, e.g., techniques that employ site directed nucleases such as CRISPR-Cas, zinc finger nucleases, transcription activator-like effector nucleases (TALENs), and meganucleases,
In some embodiments, an insertion site for the transcription unit on Chr 2 is located between two nucleotide positions corresponding to positions xi and yi in SEQ ID NO:l, wherein xi and yi are selected from the group consisting of: 10 and 1200; 25 and 900; 50 and 600; 100 and 300; 200 and 250 and 211 and 218. In an embodiment, an insertion site on Chr 2 is located between two nucleotide positions corresponding to positions 100,817,368 and 100,817,374 in the hgl9 sequence for Chr 2.
In some embodiments, an insertion site for the transcription unit on Chr 5 is located between two nucleotide positions corresponding to positions X2 and yi in SEQ ID NO:2, wherein X2 and yi are selected from the group consisting of: 10 and 1100; 20 and 800; 30 and 500; 40 and 200; 50 and 100; and 59 and 60. In an embodiment, an insertion site on Chr 5 is located between two nucleotide positions corresponding to positions 53,853,740 and 53,853,741 in the hgl9 sequence for Chr 5.
In some embodiments, an insertion site for the transcription unit on Chr 12 is located between two nucleotide positions corresponding to positions X3 and y3 in SEQ ID NO:3, wherein X3 and y3 are selected from the group consisting of: 50 and 1200; 100 and 1000; 200 and 800; 400 and 600; 500 and 550; and 518 and 525. In an embodiment, an insertion site on Chr 5 is located between two nucleotide positions corresponding to positions 122,186,872 and 122,186,877 in the hgl9 sequence for Chr 12.
In some embodiments, an insertion site for the transcription unit on Chr 8 is located between two nucleotide positions corresponding to positions X4 and y4 in SEQ ID NO:26, wherein X4 and y4 are selected from the group consisting of: 50 and 950; 150 and 850; 300 and 700; 400 and 600; 425 and 475; and 440 and 445. In an embodiment, an insertion site on Chr 8 is located between two nucleotide positions corresponding to positions 30,105,939 and 30,105,944 in the human hg38 reference genome sequence for Chr 8.
In an embodiment, an exogenous transcription unit is inserted into one, two, three or all four of the target OCRs on Chr 2, Chr 5, Chr 8 and Chr 12 of the genetically modified cell. The transcription unit in each insertion site may encode the same or different substance, e.g., a polypeptide. Two or more transcription units may be inserted in tandem at a single site in a target OCR, and may encode the same or different substances. In an embodiment, the promoter in the upstream transcription unit is different than the promoter in the downstream transcription unit. In an embodiment, the two transcription units are identical with each other except for the promoter.
The promoter sequence in each inserted transcription unit may be for any promoter capable of driving expression of a coding sequence operably linked to the promoter in the genetically modified cell. In an embodiment, the promoter sequence consists essentially of, or consists of, SEQ ID NO:4 or a nucleotide sequence that is substantially identical to SEQ ID NO:4, e.g., is at least 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99% or more identical to SEQ ID NO:4. In an embodiment, the promoter consists of SEQ ID NO:4. In an embodiment, the promoter sequence consists essentially of, or consists of, SEQ ID NO: 5 or a nucleotide sequence that is substantially identical to SEQ ID NO:5, e.g., is at least 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99% or more identical to SEQ ID NO:5. In an embodiment, the promoter consists of SEQ ID NO:5.
In an embodiment, the genetically modified cell comprises two transcription units inserted in tandem in at least one of the target OCRs described herein. In an embodiment, the promoter sequence in the upstream transcription unit comprises SEQ ID NO:4 or a nucleotide sequence that is substantially identical to SEQ ID NO:4, e.g., is at least 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99% or more identical to SEQ ID NO:4. In an embodiment, the promoter sequence in the upstream transcription unit comprises SEQ ID NO:5 or a nucleotide sequence that is substantially identical to SEQ ID NO:5, e.g., is at least 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99% or more identical to SEQ ID NO:5. In an embodiment, the promoter sequences recited in the previous sentence are reversed, such that the upstream transcription unit comprises SEQ ID NO:5 or the substantially similar nucleotide sequence and the downstream transcription unit comprises SEQ ID NO:5 or the substantially similar nucleotide sequence.
The coding sequence in each inserted transcription unit may be operably linked to a polyA signal sequence, which sequence may be the same or different in each transcription unit. In an embodiment, the polyA signal sequence consists essentially of, or consists of, SEQ ID NO:6 or a nucleotide sequence that is substantially identical to SEQ ID NO:6, e.g., is at least 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99% or more identical to SEQ ID NO:6. In an embodiment, the polyA signal sequence consists of SEQ ID NO:6.
In some embodiments, the exogenous transcription unit encodes a therapeutic polypeptide (e.g., a protein), such as a clotting factor, growth factor, hormone, enzyme, cytokine (e.g., a pro- inflammatory cytokine or an anti-inflammatory cytokine), cytokine receptor, chimeric protein, fusion protein or lipoprotein. The polypeptide encoded by the exogenous transcription unit may have a naturally occurring amino acid sequence or may contain a variant of the naturally occurring sequence. The variant can be a non-naturally occurring or naturally occurring amino acid substitution, mutation, deletion or addition relative to the reference (e.g., naturally occurring) sequence. The naturally occurring amino acid sequence may be a polymorphic variant. The naturally occurring amino acid sequence can be a human or a non-human amino acid sequence. In some embodiments, the naturally occurring amino acid sequence is a human sequence. In some embodiments, the therapeutic polypeptide has about 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, or less than 50 amino acids. In some embodiments, the polypeptide has an average molecular weight of 5 kD, 10 kD, 25 kD, 50 kD, 100 kD, 150 kD, 200 kD, 250 kD, 500 kD, or more.
In some embodiments, the polypeptide is a hormone. Exemplary hormones include anti diuretic hormone (ADH), oxytocin, growth hormone (GH), prolactin, growth hormone-releasing hormone (GHRH), thyroid stimulating hormone (TSH), thyrotropin-release hormone (TRH), adrenocorticotropic hormone (ACTH), follicle-stimulating hormone (FSH), luteinizing hormone (LH), luteinizing hormone-releasing hormone (LHRH), thyroxine, calcitonin, parathyroid hormone (PTH), aldosterone, cortisol, epinephrine, glucagon, insulin, estrogen, progesterone, and testosterone. In some embodiments, the polypeptide is insulin (e.g., insulin A-chain, insulin B- chain, or proinsulin). In some embodiments, the polypeptide is a growth hormone, such as human growth hormone (hGH), recombinant human growth hormone (rhGH), bovine growth hormone, methionine-human growth hormone, des-phenylalanine human growth hormone, and porcine growth hormone.
In some embodiments, the polypeptide is a growth factor, e.g., vascular endothelial growth factor (VEGF), nerve growth factor (NGF), platelet-derived growth factor (PDGF), fibroblast growth factor (FGF), epidermal growth factor (EGF), transforming growth factor (TGF), and insulin-like growth factor-I and -II (IGF-I and IGF-II).
In some embodiments, the polypeptide is a clotting factor or a coagulation factor, e.g., a blood clotting factor or a blood coagulation factor. In some embodiments, the polypeptide is involved in coagulation, i.e., the process by which blood is converted from a liquid to solid or gel. Exemplary clotting factors and coagulation factors include Factor I (e.g., fibrinogen), Factor II (e.g., prothrombin), Factor III (e.g., tissue factor), Factor V (e.g., proaccelerin, labile factor), Factor VI, Factor VII (e.g., stable factor, proconvertin), Factor VIII (e.g., antihemophilic factor A), Factor VIIIC, Factor IX (e.g., antihemophilic factor B), Factor X (e.g., Stuart-Prower factor), Factor XI (e.g., plasma thromboplastin antecedent), Factor XII (e.g., Hagerman factor), Factor XIII (e.g., fibrin-stabilizing factor), von Willebrand factor (vWF), prekallikrein, heparin cofactor II, high molecular weight kininogen (e.g., Fitzgerald factor), antithrombin III, and fibronectin. In some embodiments, the polypeptide is an anti-clotting factor, such as Protein C.
In some embodiments, the polypeptide is an immunoglobulin chain (heavy or light chain) or fragment thereof, comprising at least one immunoglobulin variable domain sequence, and optionally comprising an immunoglobulin Fc region. In an embodiment, the polypeptide a full- length immunoglobulin chain.
In some embodiments, the polypeptide is a cytokine or a cytokine receptor, or a chimeric protein including cytokines or their receptors, including, for example tumor necrosis factor alpha and beta, their receptors and their derivatives, renin; lipoproteins; colchicine; corticotrophin; vasopressin; somatostatin; lypressin; pancreozymin; leuprolide; alpha- 1 -antitrypsin; atrial natriuretic factor; lung surfactant; a plasminogen activator other than a tissue-type plasminogen activator (t-PA), for example a urokinase; bombesin; thrombin; enkephalinase; RANTES (regulated on activation normally T-cell expressed and secreted); human macrophage inflammatory protein (MIP-1 -alpha); a serum albumin such as human serum albumin; mullerian- inhibiting substance; relaxin A-chain; relaxinB-chain; prorelaxin; mouse gonadotropin-associated peptide; chorionic gonadotropin; a microbial protein, such as beta-lactamase; DNase; inhibin; activin; receptors for hormones or growth factors; integrin; protein A or D; rheumatoid factors; platelet-derived growth factor (PDGF); epidermal growth factor (EGF); transforming growth factor (TGF) such as TGF-a and TGF-b, including TGF-bI, TGF^2, TGF^3, TGF^4, or TGF- b5; insulin-like growth factor-I and -II (IGF-I and IGF-II); des(l-3)-IGF-I (brain IGF-I), insulin- like growth factor binding proteins; CD proteins such as CD-3, CD-4, CD-8, and CD- 19; erythropoietin; osteoinductive factors; immunotoxins; an interferon such as interferon-alpha (e.g., interferon. alpha.2 A), -beta, -gamma, -lambda and consensus interferon; colony stimulating factors (CSFs), e.g., M-CSF, GM-CSF, and G-CSF; interleukins (ILs), e.g., IL-1, IL-2 to IL-10; superoxide dismutase; T-cell receptors; surface membrane proteins; decay accelerating factor; transport proteins; homing receptors; addressins; fertility inhibitors such as the prostaglandins; fertility promoters; regulatory proteins; antibodies (including fragments thereof) and chimeric proteins, such as immunoadhesins. Suitable polypeptides may be native or recombinant and include, e.g., fusion proteins.
Examples of a polypeptide that may be encoded by the exogenous transcription unit also include CCL1, CCL2 (MCP-1), CCL3 (MPMa), CCL4 (MPMb), CCL5 (RANTES), CCL6, CCL7, CCL8, CCL9 (CCL10), CCL11, CCL12, CCL13, CCL14, CCL15, CCL16, CCL17, CCL18, CCL19, CCL20, CCL21, CCL22, CCL23, CCL24, CCL25, CCL26, CCL27, CCL28, CXCL1 (KC), CXCL2 (SDFla), CXCL3, CXCL4, CXCL5, CXCL6, CXCL7, CXCL8 (IL8), CXCL9, CXCL10, CXCL11, CXCL12, CXCL13, CXCL14, CXCL15, CXCL16, CXCL17, CX3CL1, XCL1, XCL2, TNFA, TNFB (LTA), TNFC (LTB), TNFSF4, TNFSF5 (CD40LG), TNFSF6, TNFSF7, TNFSF8, TNFSF9, TNFSF10, TNFSF11, TNFSF13B, EDA, IL2, IL15, IL4, IL13, IL7, IL9, IL21, IL3, IL5, IL6, IL11, IL27, IL30, IL31, OSM, LIF, CNTF, CTF1, IL12a, IL12b, IL23, IL27, IL35, IL14, IL16, IL32, IL34, IL10, IL22, IL19, IL20, IL24, IL26, IL29, IFNL1, IFNL2, IFNL3, IL28, IFNA1, IFNA2, IFNA4, IFNA5, IFNA6, IFNA7, IFNA8, IFNA10, IFNA13, IFNA14, IFNA16, IFNA17, IFNA21, IFNB1, IFNK, IFNW1, IFNG, ILIA (IL1F1), ILIB (IL1F2), ILlRa (IL1F3), IL1F5 (IL36RN), IL1F6 (IL36A), IL1F7 (IL37), IL1F8 (IL36B), IL1F9 (IL36G), IL1F10 (IL38), IL33 (IL1F11), IL18 (IL1G), IL17, KITLG, IL25 (IL17E), CSF1 (M-CSF), CSF2 (GM-CSF), CSF3 (G-CSF), SPP1, TGFB1, TGFB2, TGFB3, CCL3L1, CCL3L2, CCL3L3, CCL4L1, CCL4L2, IL17B, IL17C, IL17D, IL17F, AIMP1 (SCYE1), MIF, Areg, BC096441, Bmpl, BmplO, Bmpl5, Bmp2, Bmp3, Bmp4, Bmp5, Bmp6, Bmp7, Bmp8a, Bmp8b, Clqtnf4, Ccl21a, Ccl27a, Cd70, Cerl, Cklf, Clcfl, Cmtm2a, Cmtm2b, Cmtm3, Cmtm4, Cmtm5, Cmtm6, Cmtm7, Cmtm8, Crlfl, Ctf2, Ebi3, Ednl, Fam3b, Fasl, Fgf2, Flt31, GdflO, Gdfl 1, Gdfl5, Gdf2, Gdfi, Gdf5, Gdf6, Gdf7, Gdf9, Gml2597, Gml3271, Gml3275, Gml3276, Gml3280, Gml3283, Gm2564, Gpil, Greml, Grem2, Gm, Hmgbl, Ifinal l, Ifnal2, Ifna9, Ifinab, line, 1117a, 1123a, 1125, 1131, Iltifb, Inhba, Lefty 1, Lefty2, Mstn, Nampt, Ndp, Nodal, Pf4, Pglyrpl, Prl7dl, Scg2, Scgb3al, Slurpl, Sppl, Thpo, TnfsflO, Tnfsfll, Tnfsfl2, Tnfsfl3, Tnfsfl3b, Tnfsfl4, Tnfsfl5, Tnfsfl8, Tnfsf4, TnfsfB, Tnfsf9, Tslp, Vegfa, Wntl, Wnt2, Wnt5a, Wnt7a, Xcll, epinephrine, melatonin, triiodothyronine, a prostaglandin, a leukotriene, prostacyclin, thromboxane, islet amyloid polypeptide, mullerian inhibiting factor or hormone, adiponectin, corticotropin, angiotensin, vasopressin, arginine vasopressin, atriopeptin, brain natriuretic peptide, calcitonin, cholecystokinin, cortistatin, enkephalin, endothelin, erythropoietin, follicle-stimulating hormone, galanin, gastric inhibitory polypeptide, gastrin, ghrelin, glucagon, glucagon-like peptide- 1, gonadotropin-releasing hormone, hepcidin, human chorionic gonadotropin, human placental lactogen, inhibin, somatomedin, leptin, lipotropin, melanocyte stimulating hormone, motilin, orexin, oxytocin, pancreatic polypeptide, pituitary adenylate cyclase-activating peptide, relaxin, renin, secretin, somatostatin, thrombopoietin, thyrotropin, thyrotropin-releasing hormone, vasoactive intestinal peptide, androgen, alpha-glucosidase (also known as acid maltase), glycogen phosphorylase, glycogen debrancher enzyme, phosphofructokinase, phosphoglycerate kinase, phosphoglycerate mutase, lactate dehydrogenase, carnitine palymityl transferase, carnitine, and myoadenylate deaminase.
In some embodiments, the polypeptide is a replacement therapy or a replacement protein. In some embodiments, the replacement therapy or replacement protein is a clotting factor or a coagulation factor, e.g., Factor VII, Factor VIII (e.g., comprises a naturally occurring human Factor VIII amino acid sequence or a variant thereof) or Factor IX (e.g., comprises a naturally occurring human Factor IX amino acid sequence or a variant thereof).
In some embodiments, the transcription unit encodes a FVII protein, e.g., a human FVII protein, e.g., comprises, consists essentially of, or consists of SEQ ID NO: 18.
In some embodiments, the transcription unit encodes a Factor VIII protein, e.g., a human Factor VIII protein. In some embodiments, the Factor VIII protein is a B -domain-deleted Factor VIII protein (FVIII-BDD). In an embodiment, the FVIII-BDD protein comprises, consists essentially of, or consists of SEQ ID NO:8.
In some embodiments, the transcription unit encodes a Factor IX protein, e.g., a human Factor IX (FIX) protein. In some embodiments, the FIX protein is a FIX-padua protein and comprises, consists essentially of, or consists of SEQ ID NO: 16. In some embodiments, the replacement therapy or replacement protein is an enzyme, e.g., alpha-galactosidase A (GLA), alpha-L-iduronidase (IDUA), glucocerebrosidase, or N- sulfoglucosamine sulfohydrolase (SGSH).
In an embodiment, the genetically modified cells have one or more of the following characteristics: (i) are not capable of producing insulin (e.g., insulin A-chain, insulin B-chain, or proinsulin) in an amount effective to treat diabetes or another disease or condition that may be treated with insulin; (ii) not capable of producing insulin in a glucose-responsive manner; or (iii) not derived from an induced pluripotent stem cell that was engineered or differentiated into insulin- producing pancreatic beta cells.
Devices
A genetically modified cell described herein, e.g., a genetically modified RPE cell, or a plurality of such cells may be incorporated into, e.g., encapsulated within, an implantable device for use in providing a polypeptide encoded by the inserted transcription unit to a subject.
Exemplary implantable devices comprise materials such as metals, metallic alloys, ceramics, polymers, fibers, inert materials, and combinations thereof. The device can have any configuration and shape appropriate for supporting the viability and productivity of the encapsulated cells after implant into the intended target location. In some embodiments, the device is a hydrogel capsule, e.g., a millicapsule or a microcapsule (e.g., a hydrogel millicapsule or a hydrogel microcapsule). The device (e.g., capsule, particle) may comprise (and optionally is configured to release) one or more exogenous agents that are not expressed by the engineered cells. Such exogenous agents may include, e.g., a nucleic acid (e.g., an RNA or DNA molecule), a protein (e.g., a hormone, an enzyme (e.g., glucose oxidase, kinase, phosphatase, oxygenase, hydrogenase, reductase), an antibody, an antibody fragment, an antigen, a small molecule, a lipid, a drug, vaccine, or any derivative thereof, a small-molecule, an active or inactive fragment of a protein or polypeptide. In some embodiments, the device comprises at least one means for mitigating the foreign body response (FBR), for example, mitigate the FBR when the device is implanted into or onto a subject.
A device described herein may be provided as a preparation or composition for implantation or administration to a subject, i.e., a device preparation or device composition. In some embodiments, a device preparation or device composition comprises at least 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 or more devices, and at least 20%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95% or 100% of the devices in the preparation or composition have a characteristic as described herein, e.g., mean capsule diameter, or number of cells in the cell- containing compartment.
A device, device preparation or device composition may be configured for implantation, or is implanted or disposed, into or onto any site or part of the body. In some embodiments, the implantable device or device preparation is configured for implantation into the peritoneal cavity (e.g., the lesser sac, also known as the omental bursa or bursalis omentum). A device, device preparation or device composition may be implanted in the peritoneal cavity (e.g., the omentum, e.g., the lesser sac) or disposed on a surface within the peritoneal cavity (e.g., omentum, e.g., lesser sac) via injection or catheter. Additional considerations for implantation or disposition of a device, device preparation or device composition into the omentum (e.g., the lesser sac) are provided in M. Pellicciaro et al. (2017) CellR4 5(3): e2410.
In some embodiments, the implantable device comprises at least one cell-containing compartment comprising a plurality of live genetically modified cells encapsulated by a polymer composition. In an embodiment, the device contains two, three, four or more cell -containing compartments, each of which comprises a plurality of live, engineered cells described herein. In an embodiment, the cells in at least one of the compartments are capable of expressing and secreting GLA or a blood clotting factor, e.g., an FVIII protein, when the device is implanted into a subject.
In some embodiments, the polymer composition in the cell-containing compartment(s) comprises a polysaccharide or other hydrogel-forming polymer (e.g., alginate, hyaluronate or chondroitin). In some embodiments, the polymer is an alginate, which is a polysaccharide made up of b-D-mannuronic acid (M) and a-L-guluronic acid (G). In some embodiments, the alginate has a low molecular weight (e.g., approximate molecular weight of < 75 kD) and G:M ratio > 1.5, ii) a medium molecular weight alginate, e.g., has approximate molecular weight of 75-150 kDa and G:M ratio > 1.5, (ill) a high molecular weight alginate, e.g., has an approximate MW of 150 kDa - 250 kDa and G:M ratio > 1.5, (iv) or a blend of two or more of these alginates.
In some embodiments, the cell-containing compartment(s) further comprises at least one cell-binding substance (CBS), e.g., a cell-binding peptide (CBP) or cell-binding polypeptide (CBPP). In an embodiment, the CBS comprises a CBP covalently attached to polymer molecules in the polymer composition via a linker (“CBP-polymer”). In an embodiment, the polymer in the CBP-polymer is a polysaccharide (e.g., an alginate) or other hydrogel -forming polymer. Various cell-binding peptides for use in the devices of the disclosure are described herein. In an embodiment, the cell -binding peptide is 25 amino acids or less (e.g., 20, 15, 10 or less) in length and comprises the cell binding sequence of a ligand for a cell-adhesion molecule (CAM). In an embodiment, the cell-binding peptide consists essentially of a cell binding sequence shown in Table 1 herein. In an embodiment, the cell binding sequence is RGD or RGDSP. In an embodiment, the amino terminus of the cell-binding peptide is covalently attached to the polymer via an amino acid linker. In an embodiment, the amino acid linker consists essentially of one to three glycine residues. In an embodiment, the cell-binding peptide consists essentially of RGD or RGDSP and the linker consists essentially of a single glycine residue.
In some embodiments, the device further comprises at least one means for mitigating the foreign body response (FBR), for example, mitigate the FBR when the device is implanted into or onto a subject. Various means for mitigating the FBR of the devices are described herein, but any biological, chemical or physical element that is capable of reducing the FBR to the device compared to a reference device is contemplated herein.
For example, the means for mitigating the FBR in devices disclosed herein can comprise surrounding the cells with a semi-permeable biocompatible membrane having a pore size that is selected to allow oxygen and other molecules important to cell survival and function to move through the semi-permeable membrane while preventing immune cells from traversing through the pores. In an embodiment, the semi-permeable membrane has a molecular weight cutoff of less than 1000 kD or between 50-700 kD, 70-300 kD, or between 70-150 kD, or between 70 and 130 kD.
Another FBR-mitigating means comprises completely surrounding the cell -containing compartment with a barrier compartment formed from a cell-free biocompatible material, such as the two or three layer capsules described in WO 2014/153127, WO 2016/019391 or the core-shell microcapsules described in Ma, M et ak, Adv. Healthc Mater., 2(5):667-672 (2012). Such a barrier compartment could be used with or without the semi-permeable membrane means. FBR-mitigating means can comprise disposing on or within the device an anti-inflammatory drug that is released from the implanted device to inhibit FBR, e.g., as described in US Patent No. 9,867,781. Other FBR-mitigating means employ a CSF-1R inhibitor that is disposed on the device surface or encapsulated within the device, as described in WO 2017/176792 and WO 2017/176804. Other FBR-mitigating means employ configuring the device in a spherical shape with a diameter of greater than 1 mm, as described in Veiseh, O., et al., Nature Materials 14:643-652 (2015).
In some embodiments, the means for mitigating the FBR comprises disposing an afibrotic compound on the exterior surface of the device and / or within a barrier compartment surrounding the cell-containing compartment. Exemplary afibrotic compounds include compounds of Formula (I) described herein below. In some embodiments, the device can comprise combinations of two or more of the above FBR-mitigating means.
In some embodiments, the device has two hydrogel compartments, in which the inner, cell- containing compartment is completely surrounded by the second, outer (e.g., barrier) compartment. In an embodiment, the inner boundary of the second compartment forms an interface with the outer boundary of the first compartment, e.g., as illustrated in FIG. 7.
In some embodiments, one or more compartments in a device comprises an afibrotic polymer, e.g., an afibrotic compound of Formula (I) (defined herein below) covalently attached to a polymer that is the same or different than the polymer in the CBP-polymer. In an embodiment, some or all the monomers in the afibrotic polymer are modified with the same compound of Formula (I). In some embodiments, some or all the monomers in the afibrotic polymer are modified with different compounds of Formula (I). In some embodiments in which the device is a two- compartment hydrogel capsule, the afibrotic polymer is present only in the outer, barrier compartment, including its outer surface.
One or more compartments in a device may comprise an unmodified polymer that is the same or different than the polymer in the CBP-polymer and in any afibrotic polymer that is present in the device. In an embodiment, the first compartment, second compartment or all compartments in the device comprises the unmodified polymer. In some embodiments, the unmodified polymer is an unmodified alginate. In an embodiment, the unmodified alginate has a molecular weight of 150 kDa - 250 kDa and a G:M ratio of > 1 5
Compounds of Formula (I)
In some embodiments, the devices described herein comprise a compound of Formula (I):
Figure imgf000046_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein: A is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, -0-, -C(0)0-, -C(O)-, -OC(O)-, -N(RC)-, -N(Rc)C(0)-, -C(0)N(Rc)-, -N(Rc)C(0)(Ci-C6- alkylene)-, -N(Rc)C(0)(C2-C6-alkenylene)-, -N(RC)N(R°)-, -NCN-, -C(=N(Rc)(RD))0-, -S-, -S(0)x-, -0S(0)x-, -N(Rc)S(0)x-, -S(0)xN(Rc)-, -P(RF)y-, -Si(ORA)2 -, -Si(RG)(ORA)-, -B(ORa)-, or a metal, each of which is optionally linked to an attachment group (e.g., an attachment group described herein) and is optionally substituted by one or more R1; each of L1 and L3 is independently a bond, alkyl, or heteroalkyl, wherein each alkyl and heteroalkyl is optionally substituted by one or more R2;
L2 is a bond;
M is absent, alkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, each of which is optionally substituted by one or more R3;
P is absent, cycloalkyl, heterocycyl, or heteroaryl, each of which is optionally substituted by one or more R4;
Z is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, -ORA, -C(0)RA, -C(0)0RA, -C(0)N(RC)(Rd), -N(RC)C(0)Ra, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is optionally substituted by one or more R5; each Ra, Rb, Rc, Rd, Re, Rf, and R° is independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, halogen, azido, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is optionally substituted with one or more R6; or Rc and R°, taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, form a ring (e.g., a 5-7 membered ring), optionally substituted with one or more R6; each R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, and R6 is independently alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, halogen, cyano, azido, oxo, -ORA1, -C(0)0RA1, -C(0)RB1,-0C(0)RB1, -N(RC1)(RD1), -N(RC1)C(0)RB1, -C(0)N(Rc1), SRe1, S(0)XRe1, -0S(0)XRe1, -N(RC1)S(0)XRe1,
- S(0)xN(Rcl)(RD1), -P(RF1)y, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is optionally substituted by one or more R7; each RA1, Rb1, RC1, Rd1, Re1, and RF1 is independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl is optionally substituted by one or more R7; each R7 is independently alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, halogen, cyano, oxo, hydroxyl, cycloalkyl, or heterocyclyl; x is 1 or 2; and y is 2, 3, or 4.
In some embodiments, the compound of Formula (I) is a compound of Formula (I-a):
Figure imgf000048_0001
or a salt thereof, wherein:
A is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, -0-, -C(0)0-, -C(O)-, -OC(O)-, -N(RC)-, -N(Rc)C(0)-, -C(0)N(Rc)-, -N(RC)N(R°)-, -NCN-, - N(RC)C(0)(CI-C6- alkylene)-, -N(Rc)C(0)(C2-C6-alkenylene)-, -C(=N(Rc)(RD))0-, -S-,- S(0)x-, -0S(0)x-, -N(Rc)S(0)x-, -S(0)xN(Rc)-, -P(RF)y-, -Si(ORA)2 -, -Si(RG)(ORA)-, - B(ORa)-, or a metal, each of which is optionally linked to an attachment group (e.g., an attachment group described herein) and optionally substituted by one or more R1; each of L1 and L3 is independently a bond, alkyl, or heteroalkyl, wherein each alkyl and heteroalkyl is optionally substituted by one or more R2;
L2 is a bond;
M is absent, alkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, each of which is optionally substituted by one or more R3;
P is heteroaryl optionally substituted by one or more R4;
Z is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, each of which is optionally substituted by one or more R5; each Ra, Rb, Rc, Rd, Re, Rf, and R° is independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, halogen, azido, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is optionally substituted with one or more R6; or Rc and R°, taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, form a ring (e.g., a 5-7 membered ring), optionally substituted with one or more R6; each R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, and R6 is independently alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, halogen, cyano, azido, oxo, -ORA1, -C(0)0RA1, -C(0)RB1,-0C(0)RB1, -N(RC1)(RD1), -N(RC1)C(0)RB1, -C(0)N(Rc1), SRe1, S(0)XRe1, -0S(0)XRe1, -N(RC1)S(0)XRe1,
- S(0)xN(Rcl)(RD1), -P(RF1)y, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is optionally substituted by one or more R7; each RA1, Rb1, RC1, Rd1, Re1, and RF1 is independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl is optionally substituted by one or more R7; each R7 is independently alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, halogen, cyano, oxo, hydroxyl, cycloalkyl, or heterocyclyl; x is 1 or 2; and y is 2, 3, or 4.
In some embodiments, for Formulas (I) or (I-a), A is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, -0-, -C(0)0-, -C(O)-, -OC(O) -, -N(Rc)C(0)-, -N(Rc)C(0)(Ci-C6-alkylene)-, -N(Rc)C(0)(C2-C6-alkenylene)-, or -N(RC)-. In some embodiments, A is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, -0-, — C(0)0— , — C(O)— , -OC(O) -, or -N(RC)-. In some embodiments, A is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, -0-, -C(0)0-, -C(0)-,-0C(0) -, or -N(RC)-. In some embodiments, A is alkyl, -0-, -C(0)0-, -C(0)-, -0C(0), or -N(RC)-. In some embodiments, A is -N(Rc)C(0)-, -N(Rc)C(0)(Ci-C6-alkylene)-, or -N(Rc)C(0)(Ci-C6-alkenylene)-. In some embodiments, A is -N(RC)-. In some embodiments, A is -N(RC) -, and Rc an Ru is independently hydrogen or alkyl. In some embodiments, A is -NH-. In some embodiments, A is -N(Rc)C(0)(Ci-C6-alkylene)-, wherein alkylene is substituted with R1. In some embodiments, A is -N(Rc)C(0)(Ci-C6-alkylene)- , and R1 is alkyl (e.g., methyl). In some embodiments, A is -NHC(0)C(CH3)2-. In some embodiments, A is -N(Rc)C(0)(methylene)-, andR1 is alkyl (e.g., methyl). In some embodiments, A is -NHC(0)CH(CH3)-. In some embodiments, A is -NHC(0)C(CH3)-.
In some embodiments, for Formulas (I) or (I-a), L1 is a bond, alkyl, or heteroalkyl. In some embodiments, L1 is a bond or alkyl. In some embodiments, L1 is a bond. In some embodiments, L1 is alkyl. In some embodiments, L1 is C1-C6 alkyl. In some embodiments, L1 is — CH2— , -CH(CH3)-, -CH2CH2CH2, or -CH2CH2- In some embodiments, L1 is -CH2-or
-CH2CH2-.
In some embodiments, for Formulas (I) or (I-a), L3 is a bond, alkyl, or heteroalkyl. In some embodiments, L3 is a bond. In some embodiments, L3 is alkyl. In some embodiments, L3 is Ci- Ci2 alkyl. In some embodiments, L3 is C1-C6 alkyl. In some embodiments, L3 is -CH2- In some embodiments, L3 is heteroalkyl. In some embodiments, L3 is Ci-Ci2 heteroalkyl, optionally substituted with one or more R2 (e.g., oxo). In some embodiments, L3 is C1-C6 heteroalkyl, optionally substituted with one or more R2 (e.g., oxo). In some embodiments, L3 is -C(0)0CH2- -CH2(0CH2CH2)2-, -CH2(0CH2CH2) -, CH2CH20-, or -CH20-. In some embodiments, L3 is -CH20-.
In some embodiments, for Formulas (I) or (I-a), M is absent, alkyl, heteroalkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl. In some embodiments, M is heteroalkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl. In some embodiments, M is absent. In some embodiments, M is alkyl (e.g., C1-C6 alkyl). In some embodiments, M is -CH2- . In some embodiments, M is heteroalkyl (e.g., C1-C6 heteroalkyl). In some embodiments, M is (- OCH2CH2-)Z, wherein z is an integer selected from 1 to 10. In some embodiments, z is an integer selected from 1 to 5. In some embodiments, M is -OCH2CH2-, (-OCH2CH2-)2, (-OCH2CH2-) , (-0CH2CH2-)4, or (-OCH2CH2-)5. In some embodiments, M is -OCH2CH2-, (- OCH2CH2-)2, (-OCH2CH2-) , or (-OCH2CH2-)4. In some embodiments, M is (-OCH2CH2-) . In some embodiments, M is aryl. In some embodiments, M is phenyl. In some embodiments, M is unsubstituted phenyl. In some embodiments, M is
Figure imgf000050_0001
some embodiments, M is phenyl substituted with R (e.g., 1 R ). In some embodiments, M is
Figure imgf000050_0002
. In some embodiments, R7 is CF3.
In some embodiments, for Formulas (I) or (I-a), P is absent, heterocyclyl, or heteroaryl. In some embodiments, P is absent. In some embodiments, for Formulas (I) and (I-a), P is a tricyclic, bicyclic, or monocyclic heteroaryl. In some embodiments, P is a monocyclic heteroaryl. In some embodiments, P is a nitrogen-containing heteroaryl. In some embodiments, P is a monocyclic, nitrogen-containing heteroaryl. In some embodiments, P is a 5-membered heteroaryl. In some embodiments, P is a 5-membered nitrogen-containing heteroaryl. In some embodiments, P is tetrazolyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, or triazolyl, pyrrolyl, oxazolyl, or thiazolyl. In some embodiments, P is tetrazolyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, or triazolyl, or pyrrolyl. In some embodiments,
P is imidazolyl. In some embodiments, P is
Figure imgf000051_0001
. In some embodiments, P is triazolyl. In some embodiments, P is 1,2,3-triazolyl. In some embodiments, P is
Figure imgf000051_0002
In some embodiments, P is heterocyclyl. In some embodiments, P is a 5-membered heterocyclyl or a 6-membered heterocyclyl. In some embodiments, P is imidazolidinonyl. In
O some embodiments, P is
Figure imgf000051_0003
. In some embodiments, P is thiomorpholinyl-l,l-dioxidyl.
In some embodiments,
Figure imgf000051_0004
In some embodiments, for Formulas (I) or (I-a), Z is alkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl. In some embodiments, Z is heterocyclyl. In some embodiments, Z is monocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclyl. In some embodiments, Z is an oxygen-containing heterocyclyl. In some embodiments, Z is a 4-membered heterocyclyl, 5-membered heterocyclyl, or 6-membered heterocyclyl. In some embodiments, Z is a 6-membered heterocyclyl. In some embodiments, Z is a 6-membered oxygen-containing heterocyclyl. In some embodiments, Z is tetrahydropyranyl. In some
Figure imgf000051_0005
In some embodiments, Z is a 4-membered oxygen-containing heterocyclyl. In some embodiments, Z is
Figure imgf000051_0006
In some embodiments, Z is a bicyclic oxygen-containing heterocyclyl. In some embodiments, Z is phthalic anhydridyl. In some embodiments, Z is a sulfur-containing heterocyclyl. In some embodiments, Z is a 6-membered sulfur-containing heterocyclyl. n some embodiments, Z is a 6-membered heterocyclyl containing a nitrogen atom and a sulfur atom. In some embodiments, Z is thiomorpholinyl-1, 1-dioxidyl. In some embodiments,
Figure imgf000052_0001
some embodiments, Z is a nitrogen-containing heterocyclyl. In some embodiments, Z is a 6-
.Me membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclyl. In some embodiments, Z
Figure imgf000052_0002
In some embodiments, Z is a bicyclic heterocyclyl. In some embodiments, Z is a bicyclic nitrogen-containing heterocyclyl, optionally substituted with one or more R5. In some embodiments, Z is 2-oxa-7-azaspiro[3.5]nonanyl. In some embodiments,
Figure imgf000052_0003
some embodiments, Z is l-oxa-3,8-diazaspiro[4.5]decan-2-one. In some embodiments,
Figure imgf000052_0004
In some embodiments, for Formulas (I) or (I-a), Z is aryl. In some embodiments, Z is monocyclic aryl. In some embodiments, Z is phenyl. In some embodiments, Z is monosub stituted phenyl (e.g., with 1 R5). In some embodiments, Z is monosubstituted phenyl, wherein the 1 R5 is a nitrogen-containing group. In some embodiments, Z is monosubstituted phenyl, wherein the 1 R5 is NFh. In some embodiments, Z is monosubstituted phenyl, wherein the 1 R5 is an oxygen- containing group. In some embodiments, Z is monosubstituted phenyl, wherein the 1 R5 is an oxygen-containing heteroalkyl. In some embodiments, Z is monosubstituted phenyl, wherein the 1 R5 is OCH3. In some embodiments, Z is monosubstituted phenyl, wherein the 1 R5 is in the ortho position. In some embodiments, Z is monosubstituted phenyl, wherein the 1 R5 is in the meta position. In some embodiments, Z is monosubstituted phenyl, wherein the 1 R5 is in the para position.
In some embodiments, for Formulas (I) or (I-a), Z is alkyl. In some embodiments, Z is Ci- C12 alkyl. In some embodiments, Z is C1-C10 alkyl. In some embodiments, Z is Ci-Cs alkyl. In some embodiments, Z is Ci-Cs alkyl substituted with 1-5 R5. In some embodiments, Z is Ci-Cs alkyl substituted with 1 R5. In some embodiments, Z is Ci-Cs alkyl substituted with 1 R5, wherein R5 is alkyl, heteroalkyl, halogen, oxo, -ORA1, -C(0)0RA1, -C(0)RB1,-0C(0)RB1, or - N(RC1)(RD1). In some embodiments, Z is Ci-Cx alkyl substituted with 1 R5, wherein R5 is -ORA1 or -C(0)0RA1. In some embodiments, Z is Ci-Cx alkyl substituted with 1 R5, wherein R5 is - ORA1 or -C(0)0H. In some embodiments, Z is -CH3.
In some embodiments, for Formulas (I) or (I-a), Z is heteroalkyl. In some embodiments, Z is C1-C12 heteroalkyl. In some embodiments, Z is C1-C10 heteroalkyl. In some embodiments, Z is C1-C8 heteroalkyl. In some embodiments, Z is C1-C6 heteroalkyl. In some embodiments, Z is a nitrogen-containing heteroalkyl optionally substituted with one or more R5. In some embodiments, Z is a nitrogen and sulfur-containing heteroalkyl substituted with 1-5 R5. In some embodiments, Z is N-methyl-2-(methylsulfonyl)ethan-l -aminyl.
In some embodiments, Z is -ORA or -C(0)0RA. In some embodiments, Z is -ORA (e.g., - OH or -OCH3). In some embodiments, Z is -OCH3. In some embodiments, Z is -C(0)0RA (e.g., -C(O)OH).
In some embodiments, Z is hydrogen.
In some embodiments, L2 is a bond and P and L3 are independently absent. In some embodiments, L2 is a bond, P is heteroaryl, L3 is a bond, and Z is hydrogen. In some embodiments, P is heteroaryl, L3 is heteroalkyl, and Z is alkyl.
In some embodiments, the compound of Formula (I) is a compound of Formula (I-b):
Figure imgf000053_0001
or a salt thereof, wherein Ring M1 is cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, each of which is optionally substituted with 1-5 R3; Ring Z1 is cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl or heteroaryl, optionally substituted with 1-5 R5; each of R2a, R2b, R2c, and R2d is independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, halo, cyano, nitro, amino, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, or each of R2a and R2b or R2c and R2d is taken together to form an oxo group; X is absent, N(R10), O, or S; Rc is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, wherein each of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl is optionally substituted with 1-6 R6; each R3, R5, and R6 is independently alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, halogen, cyano, azido, oxo, -ORA1, -C(0)0RA1, -C(0)RB1,-0C(0)Rb1, -N(RC1)(Rd1), -N(RC1)C(0)Rb1, -C(0)N(Rc1), SRe1, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl; R10 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, -C(0)0RA1, -C(0)RB1,-0C(0)Rb1, -C(0)N(Rc1), cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl; each RA1, Rb1, RC1, Rd1, and RE1 is independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, wherein each of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl is optionally substituted with 1-6 R7; each R7 is independently alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, halogen, cyano, oxo, hydroxyl, cycloalkyl, or heterocyclyl; each m and n is independently 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6; and refers to a connection to an attachment group or a polymer described herein. In some embodiments, for each R3 and R5, each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl is optionally and independently substituted with halogen, oxo, cyano, cycloalkyl, or heterocyclyl.
In some embodiments, the compound of Formula (I-b) is a compound of Formula (I-b-i):
Figure imgf000054_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein Ring M2 is aryl or heteroaryl optionally substituted with one or more R3; Ring Z2 is cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl; each of R2a, R2b, R2c, and R2d is independently hydrogen, alkyl, or heteroalkyl, or each of R2a and R2b or R2C and R2d is taken together to form an oxo group; X is absent, O, or S; each R3 and R5 is independently alkyl, heteroalkyl, halogen, oxo, -ORA1, -C(0)0RA1, or -C(0)R , wherein each alkyl and heteroalkyl is optionally substituted with halogen; or two R5 are taken together to form a 5-6 membered ring fused to Ring Z2; each RA1 and RB1 is independently hydrogen, alkyl, or heteroalkyl; m and n are each independently 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6; p is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6; and ” refers to a connection to an attachment group or a polymer described herein.
In some embodiments, the compound of Formula (I-b-i) is a compound of Formula (I-b- ii):
Figure imgf000054_0002
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein Ring Z2 is cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl or heteroaryl; each of R2c and R2d is independently hydrogen, alkyl, or heteroalkyl, or R2c and R2d and taken together to form an oxo group; each R3 and R5 is independently alkyl, heteroalkyl, halogen, oxo, -ORA1, -C(0)0RA1, or -C(0)R , wherein each alkyl and heteroalkyl is optionally substituted with halogen; each RA1 and RB1 is independently hydrogen, alkyl, or heteroalkyl; each of p and q is independently 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6; and “ refers to a connection to an attachment group or a polymer described herein.
In some embodiments, the compound of Formula (I) is a compound of Formula (I-c):
Figure imgf000055_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein Ring Z2 is cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl or heteroaryl; each of R2c and R2d is independently hydrogen, alkyl, or heteroalkyl, or R2c and R2d is taken together to form an oxo group; each R3 and R5 is independently alkyl, heteroalkyl, halogen, oxo, -ORA1, -C(0)0Ra1, or -C(0)R , wherein each alkyl and heteroalkyl is optionally substituted with halogen; each RA1 and RB1 is independently hydrogen, alkyl, or heteroalkyl; m is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6; each of p and q is independently 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6; and refers to a connection to an attachment group or a polymer described herein.
In some embodiments, the compound of Formula (I) is a compound of Formula (I-d):
Figure imgf000055_0002
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein Ring Z2 is cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl or heteroaryl; X is absent, O, or S; each of R2a, R2b, R2c, and R2d is independently hydrogen, alkyl, or heteroalkyl, or each of R2a and R2b or R2c and R2d is taken together to form an oxo group; each R5 is independently alkyl, heteroalkyl, halogen, oxo, -ORA1, -C(0)0RA1, or-C(0)RB1, wherein each alkyl and heteroalkyl is optionally substituted with halogen; each RA1 and RB1 is independently hydrogen, alkyl, or heteroalkyl; each of m and n is independently 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6; p is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6; and “ -ww,” refers to a connection to an attachment group or a polymer described herein.
In some embodiments, the compound of Formula (I) is a compound of Formula (I-e):
Figure imgf000056_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein Ring Z2 is cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl or heteroaryl; X is absent, O, or S; each of R2a, R2b, R2c, and R2d is independently hydrogen, alkyl, or heteroalkyl, or each of R2a and R2b or R2c and R2d is taken together to form an oxo group; each R5 is independently alkyl, heteroalkyl, halogen, oxo, -ORA1, -C(0)0RA1, or -C(0)R ; each RA1 and RB1 is independently hydrogen, alkyl, or heteroalkyl; each of m and n is independently 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6; p is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6; and refers to a connection to an attachment group or a polymer described herein.
In some embodiments, the compound of Formula (I) is a compound of Formula (I-f):
Figure imgf000056_0002
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein M is alkyl optionally substituted with one or more R3; Ring P is heteroaryl optionally substituted with one or more R4; L3 is alkyl or heteroalkyl optionally substituted with one or more R2; Z is alkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, each of which is optionally substituted with one or more R5; each of R2a and R2b is independently hydrogen, alkyl, or heteroalkyl, or R2aand R2b is taken together to form an oxo group; each R2, R3, R4, and R5 is independently alkyl, heteroalkyl, halogen, oxo, - ORA1, -C(0)0Ra1, or -C(0)RB1; each RA1 and RB1 is independently hydrogen, alkyl, or heteroalkyl; n is independently 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6; and “ ” refers to a connection to an attachment group or a polymer described herein.
In some embodiments, the compound of Formula (I) is a compound of Formula (II):
Figure imgf000056_0003
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein M is a bond, alkyl or aryl, wherein alkyl and aryl is optionally substituted with one or more R3; L3 is alkyl or heteroalkyl optionally substituted with one or more R2; Z is hydrogen, alkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl or -ORA, wherein alkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is optionally substituted with one or more R5; RA is hydrogen; each of R2a and R2b is independently hydrogen, alkyl, or heteroalkyl, or R2aand R2b is taken together to form an oxo group; each R2, R3, and R5 is independently alkyl, heteroalkyl, halogen, oxo, -ORA1, -C(0)0RA1, or -C(0)R ; each RA1 and RB1 is independently hydrogen, alkyl, or heteroalkyl; n is independently 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6; and “ ·LLLL.” refers to a connection to an attachment group or a polymer described herein.
In some embodiments, the compound of Formula (II) is a compound of Formula (Il-a):
Figure imgf000057_0001
(Il-a), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein L3 is alkyl or heteroalkyl, each of which is optionally substituted with one or more R2; Z is hydrogen, alkyl, heteroalkyl, or -ORA, wherein alkyl and heteroalkyl are optionally substituted with one or more R5; each of R2a and R2b is independently hydrogen, alkyl, or heteroalkyl, or R2a and R2b is taken together to form an oxo group; each R2, R3, and R5 is independently alkyl, heteroalkyl, halogen, oxo, -ORA1, -C(0)0RA1, or-C(0)RB1; RA is hydrogen; each RA1 and R is independently hydrogen, alkyl, or heteroalkyl; n is independently 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6; and “ l~'l· ” refers to a connection to an attachment group or a polymer described herein.
In some embodiments, the compound of Formula (I) is a compound of Formula (III):
Figure imgf000057_0002
(HI), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein Z1 is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, each of which is optionally substituted with 1-5 R5; each of R2a , R2b, R2c, and R2d is independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, halo, cyano, nitro, amino, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl; or R2a and R2b or R2c and R2d are taken together to form an oxo group; Rc is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, or heteroalkyl, wherein each of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, or heteroalkyl is optionally substituted with 1-6 R6; each of R3, R5, and R6 is independently alkyl, heteroalkyl, halogen, oxo, -ORA1,
-C(0)0RA1, or -C(0)RB1; each RA1 and RB1 is independently hydrogen, alkyl, or heteroalkyl; m and n are each independently 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6; q is an integer from 0 to 25; and “ ·~ "· ” refers to a connection to an attachment group or a polymer described herein.
In some embodiments, the compound of Formula (III) is a compound of Formula (Ill-a):
Figure imgf000058_0001
(Ill-a), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein Ring Z2 is cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, each of which is optionally substituted with 1-5 R5; each of R2a , R2b, R2c, and R2d is independently hydrogen, alkyl, heteroalkyl, halo; or R2a and R2b or R2c and R2d are taken together to form an oxo group; each of R3 and R5 is independently alkyl, heteroalkyl, halogen, oxo, -ORA1, -C(0)0RA1, or -C(0)RB1; each RA1 and RB1 is independently hydrogen, alkyl, or heteroalkyl; m and n are each independently 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6; o and p are each independently 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5; q is an integer from 0 to 25; and refers to a connection to an attachment group or a polymer described herein.
In some embodiments, the compound of Formula (Ill-a) is a compound of Formula (Ill-b):
Figure imgf000058_0002
(Ill-b), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein Ring Z2 is cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, each of which is optionally substituted with 1-5 R5; each of R2a , R2b, R2c, and R2d is independently hydrogen, alkyl, heteroalkyl, halo; or R2a and R2b or R2c and R2d are taken together to form an oxo group; each of R3 and R5 is independently alkyl, heteroalkyl, halogen, oxo, -ORA1, -C(0)0RA1, or -C(0)RB1; each RA1 and RB1 is independently hydrogen, alkyl, or heteroalkyl; m and n are each independently 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6; o and p are each independently 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5; q is an integer from 0 to 25; and “ refers to a connection to an attachment group or a polymer described herein.
In some embodiments, the compound of Formula (Ill-a) is a compound of Formula (III-c):
Figure imgf000059_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein X is C(R’)(R”), N(R’), or S(0)x; each of R’ and R” is independently hydrogen, alkyl, halogen, or cycloalkyl; each of R2a , R2b, R2c, and R2d is independently hydrogen, alkyl, heteroalkyl, or halo; or R2a and R2b or R2c and R2d are taken together to form an oxo group; each of R3 and R5 is independently alkyl, heteroalkyl, halogen, oxo, -ORA1, -C(0)0RA1, or -C(0)RB1; each RA1 and RB1 is independently hydrogen, alkyl, or heteroalkyl; m and n are each independently 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6; p is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5; q is an integer from 0 to 25; x is 0, 1, or 2; and refers to a connection to an attachment group or a polymer described herein.
In some embodiments, the compound of Formula (III-c) is a compound of Formula (III-d):
Figure imgf000059_0002
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein X is C(R’)(R”), N(R’), or S(0)x; each of R’ and R” is independently hydrogen, alkyl, halogen, or cycloalkyl; each of R2a , R2b, R2c, and R2d is independently hydrogen, alkyl, heteroalkyl, or halo; or R2a and R2b or R2c and R2d are taken together to form an oxo group; each of R3 and R5 is independently alkyl, heteroalkyl, halogen, oxo, -ORA1, -C(0)0RA1, or -C(0)RB1; each RA1 and RB1 is independently hydrogen, alkyl, or heteroalkyl; m and n are each independently 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6; p is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5; q is an integer from 0 to 25; x is 0, 1, or 2; and “·~^·” refers to a connection to an attachment group or a polymer described herein.
In some embodiments, the compound is a compound of Formula (I). In some embodiments, L2 is a bond and P and L3 are independently absent. In some embodiments, the compound is a compound of Formula (I-a). In some embodiments of Formula (Il-a), L2 is a bond, P is heteroaryl, L3 is a bond, and Z is hydrogen. In some embodiments, P is heteroaryl, L3 is heteroalkyl, and Z is alkyl. In some embodiments, L2 is a bond and P and L3 are independently absent. In some embodiments, L2 is a bond, P is heteroaryl, L3 is a bond, and Z is hydrogen. In some embodiments, P is heteroaryl, L3 is heteroalkyl, and Z is alkyl.
In some embodiments, the compound is a compound of Formula (I-b). In some embodiments, P is absent, L1 is -NHCH2, L2 is a bond, M is aryl (e.g., phenyl), L3 is -CH2O, and Z is heterocyclyl (e.g., a nitrogen-containing heterocyclyl, e.g., thiomorpholinyl-1, 1-dioxide). In some embodiments, the compound of Formula (I-b) is Compound 116.
In some embodiments of Formula (I-b), P is absent, L1 is -NHCH2, L2 is a bond, M is absent, L3 is a bond, and Z is heterocyclyl (e.g., an oxygen-containing heterocyclyl, e.g., tetrahydropyranyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, oxetanyl, or oxiranyl). In some embodiments, the compound of Formula (I-b) is Compound 105.
In some embodiments, the compound is a compound of Formula (I-b-i). In some embodiments of Formula (I-b-i), each of R2a and R2b is independently hydrogen or CFb, each of R2C and R2d is independently hydrogen, m is 1 or 2, n is 1, X is O, p is 0, M2 is phenyl optionally substituted with one or more R3, R3 is -CF3, and Z2 is heterocyclyl (e.g., an oxygen-containing heterocyclyl, e.g., tetrahydropyranyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, oxetanyl, or oxiranyl). In some embodiments, the compound of Formula (I-b-i) is Compound 100, Compound 106, Compound 107, Compound 108, Compound 109, or Compound 111.
In some embodiments, the compound is a compound of Formula (I-b-ii). In some embodiments of Formula (I-b-ii), each of R2a, R2b, R2c, and R2d is independently hydrogen, q is 0, p is 0, m is 1, and Z2 is heterocyclyl (e.g., an oxygen-containing heterocyclyl, e.g., tetrahydropyranyl). In some embodiments, the compound of Formula (I-b-ii) is Compound 100.
In some embodiments, the compound is a compound of Formula (I-c). In some embodiments of Formula (I-c), each of R2c and R2d is independently hydrogen, m is 1, p is 1, q is 0, R5 is -CH3, and Z is heterocyclyl (e.g., a nitrogen-containing heterocyclyl, e.g., piperazinyl). In some embodiments, the compound of Formula (I-c) is Compound 113.
In some embodiments, the compound is a compound of Formula (I-d). In some embodiments of Formula (I-d), each of R2a, R2b, R2c, and R2d is independently hydrogen, m is 1, n is 3, X is O, p is 0, and Z is heterocyclyl (e.g., an oxygen-containing heterocyclyl, e.g., tetrahydropyranyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, oxetanyl, or oxiranyl). n some embodiments, the compound of Formula (I-d) is Compound 110 or Compound 114.
In some embodiments, the compound is a compound of Formula (I-f). In some embodiments of Formula (I-f), each of R2a and R2b is independently hydrogen, n is 1, M is -CH2-, P is a nitrogen-containing heteroaryl (e.g., imidazolyl), L3 is -C(0)OCH2-, and Z is CFb. In some embodiments, the compound of Formula (I-f) is Compound 115.
In some embodiments, the compound is a compound of Formula (Il-a). In some embodiments of Formula (Il-a), each of R2a and R2b is independently hydrogen, n is 1, q is 0, L3 is -CH2(OCH2CH2)2, and Z is -OCH3. In some embodiments, the compound of Formula (Il-a) is Compound 112.
In some embodiments of Formula (Il-a), each of R2a and R2b is independently hydrogen, n is 1, L3 is a bond or -CH? and Z is hydrogen or -OH. In some embodiments, the compound of Formula (Il-a) is Compound 103 or Compound 104.
In some embodiments, the compound is a compound of Formula (III). In some embodiments of Formula (III), each of R2a, R2b, R2c, and R2d is independently hydrogen, m is 1, n is 2, q is 3, p is 0, Rc is hydrogen, and Z1 is heteroalkyl optionally substituted with R5 (e.g., - N(CH3)(CH2CH2)S(0)2CH3). In some embodiments, the compound of Formula (III) is Compound 120
In some embodiments, the compound is a compound of Formula (Ill-b). In some embodiments of Formula (IH-b), each of R2a, R2b, R2c, and R2d is independently hydrogen, m is 0, n is 2, q is 3, p is 0, and Z2 is aryl (e.g., phenyl) substituted with 1 R5 (e.g., -NH2). In some embodiments, the compound of Formula (Ill-b) is Compound 102.
In some embodiments, the compound is a compound of Formula (Ill-b). In some embodiments of Formula (Ill-b), each of R2a, R2b, R2c, and R2d is independently hydrogen, m is 1, n is 2, q is 3, p is 0, Rc is hydrogen, and Z2 is heterocyclyl (e.g., an nitrogen-containing heterocyclyl, e.g., a nitrogen-containing spiro heterocyclyl, e.g., 2-oxa-7-azaspiro[3.5]nonanyl). In some embodiments, the compound of Formula (Ill-a) is Compound 121.
In some embodiments, the compound is a compound of Formula (Ill-d). In some embodiments of Formula (IH-d), each of R2a, R2b, R2c, and R2d is independently hydrogen, m is 1, n is 2, q is 1, 2, 3, or 4, p is 0, and X is S(0)2. In some embodiments of Formula (Ill-d), each of R2a and R2b is independently hydrogen, m is 1, n is 2, q is 1, 2, 3, or 4, p is 0, and X is S(0)2. In some embodiments, the compound of Formula (Ill-d) is Compound 101, Compound 117, Compound 118, or Compound 119.
In some embodiments, the compound is a compound of Formula (I-b), (I-d), or (I-e). In some embodiments, the compound is a compound of Formula (I-b), (I-d), or (II). In some embodiments, the compound is a compound of Formula (I-b), (I-d), or (I-f). In some embodiments, the compound is a compound of Formula (I-b), (I-d), or (III).
Exemplary compounds of Formula (I) may be prepared as described in WO 2019/169333 or any other method known to those skilled in the art.
In some embodiments, the compound of Formula (I) is not a compound disclosed in WO 2012/112982, WO 2012/167223, WO 2014/153126, WO 2016/019391, WO 2017/075630, US 2012-0213708, US 2016-0030359 or US 2016-0030360.
In some embodiments, the compound of Formula (I) comprises a compound shown in Table 3, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In some embodiments, a device described herein comprises a compound shown in Table 3, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
Figure imgf000062_0001
Figure imgf000062_0002
Figure imgf000063_0001
Figure imgf000064_0001
In some embodiments, the compound is a compound of Formula (I) (e.g., Formulas (I-a), (I-b), (I-c), (I-d), (I-e), (I-f), (II), (Il-a), (III), (Ill-a), (Ill-b), (III-c), or (III-d)), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, and is selected from:
Figure imgf000065_0001
In some embodiments, the device described herein comprises the compound of
Figure imgf000065_0002
pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
In an embodiment, a device described herein comprises a compound of Formula (I) (e.g., a compound shown in Table 3) covalently bound to an alginate polymer. The alginate polymer can be chemically modified with a compound of Formula (I) using any suitable method known in the art, e.g., as described in WO 2019/195055.
Methods of Treatment
Described herein are methods for preventing or treating a disease, disorder, or condition in a subject by administering to the subject a plurality of genetically modified cells described herein that produce a therapeutic agent that treats the disease, disorder or condition. The cells may be administered by implanting into the subject a device containing the cells as described herein, or a preparation of such devices. In an embodiment, the device or preparation is implanted (e.g., via laparoscopy) into the intraperitoneal space, e.g., the greater sac of the peritoneal cavity. In an embodiment, the genetically modified cells are engineered RPE cells, and the method comprises administering (e.g., implanting) an effective amount of a composition of two-compartment alginate hydrogel capsules which comprise the engineered RPE cells and a cell-binding polymer described herein in the inner compartment and comprise a Compound of Formula (I), e.g., Compound 101, on the outer capsule surface. In some embodiments, the method of treatment directly or indirectly reduces or alleviates at least one symptom of the disease, disorder, or condition and / or the method prevents or slows the onset of the disease, disorder, or condition. In some embodiments, the subject is a human.
In some embodiments, the disease, disorder, or condition affects a system of the body, e.g. the nervous system (e.g., peripheral nervous system (PNS) or central nervous system (CNS)), vascular system, skeletal system, respiratory system, endocrine system, lymph system, reproductive system, or gastrointestinal tract. In some embodiments, the disease, disorder, or condition affects a part of the body, e.g., blood, eye, brain, skin, lung, stomach, mouth, ear, leg, foot, hand, liver, heart, kidney, bone, pancreas, spleen, large intestine, small intestine, spinal cord, muscle, ovary, uterus, vagina, or penis.
In some embodiments, the disease, disorder or condition is a neurodegenerative disease, diabetes, a heart disease, an autoimmune disease, a cancer, a liver disease, a lysosomal storage disease, a blood clotting disorder or a coagulation disorder, an orthopedic condition, an amino acid metabolism disorder.
In some embodiments, the disease, disorder or condition is a neurodegenerative disease. Exemplary neurodegenerative diseases include Alzheimer s disease, Huntington s disease, Parkinson Ik disease (PD) amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), multiple sclerosis (MS) and cerebral palsy (CP), dentatorubro-pallidoluysian atrophy (DRPLA), neuronal intranuclear hyaline inclusion disease (NIHID), dementia with Lewy bodies, Down® syndrome, Hallervorden-Spatz disease, prion diseases, argyrophilic grain dementia, cortocobasal degeneration, dementia pugilistica, diffuse neurofibrillary tangles, Gerstmann-Straussler-Scheinker disease, Jakob-Creutzfeldt disease, Niemann-Pick disease type 3, progressive supranuclear palsy, subacute sclerosing panencephalitis, spinocerebellar ataxias, Pick® disease, and dentatorubral-pallidoluysian atrophy.
In some embodiments, the disease, disorder, or condition is an autoimmune disease, e.g., scleroderma, multiple sclerosis, lupus, or allergies.
In some embodiments, the disease is a liver disease, e.g., hepatitis B, hepatitis C, cirrhosis,
NASH. In some embodiments, the disease, disorder, or condition is cancer. Exemplary cancers include leukemia, lymphoma, melanoma, lung cancer, brain cancer (e.g., glioblastoma), sarcoma, pancreatic cancer, renal cancer, liver cancer, testicular cancer, prostate cancer, or uterine cancer.
In some embodiments, the disease, disorder, or condition is an orthopedic condition. Exemplary orthopedic conditions include osteoporosis, osteonecrosis, Paget’s disease, or a fracture.
In some embodiments, the disease, disorder or condition is a lysosomal storage disease. Exemplary lysosomal storage diseases include Gaucher disease (e.g., Type I, Type II, Type III), Tay-Sachs disease, Fabry disease, Farber disease, Hurler syndrome (also known as mucopolysaccharidosis type I (MPS I)), Hunter syndrome, lysosomal acid lipase deficiency, Niemann-Pick disease, Salla disease, Sanfilippo syndrome (also known as mucopolysaccharidosis type IIIA (MPS3A)), multiple sulfatase deficiency, Maroteaux-Lamy syndrome, metachromatic leukodystrophy, Krabbe disease, Scheie syndrome, Hurler-Scheie syndrome, Sly syndrome, hyaluronidase deficiency, Pompe disease, Danon disease, gangliosidosis, or Morquio syndrome.
In some embodiments, the disease, disorder, or condition is a blood clotting disorder or a coagulation disorder. Exemplary blood clotting disorders or coagulation disorders include hemophilia (e.g., hemophilia A or hemophilia B), Von Willebrand disease, thrombocytopenia, uremia, Bernard- Soulier syndrome, Factor XII deficiency, vitamin K deficiency, or congenital afibrinogenimia.
In some embodiments, the disease, disorder, or condition is an amino acid metabolism disorder, e.g., phenylketonuria, tyrosinemia (e.g., Type 1 or Type 2), alkaptonuria, homocystinuria, hyperhomocysteinemia, maple syrup urine disease.
In some embodiments, the disease, disorder, or condition is a fatty acid metabolism disorder, e.g., hyperlipidemia, hypercholesterolemia, galactosemia.
In some embodiments, the disease, disorder, or condition is a purine or pyrimidine metabolism disorder, e.g., Lesch-Nyhan syndrome.
In some embodiments, the disease, disorder, or condition is diabetes (e.g., Type I or Type II diabetes). In some embodiments, the disease, disorder or condition is not Type I diabetes. In some embodiments, the disease, disorder or condition is not Type II diabetes. ENUMERATED EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS
1. A genetically modified cell comprising at least one exogenous transcription unit inserted into at least one genomic open chromatin region (OCR), wherein the cell is derived from a human cell and the OCR is selected from the group consisting of: a. a first OCR on Chromosome 2 (Chr 2) and located between nucleotide positions corresponding to positions 100817157 and 100818556 in the human hgl9 reference genome (hgl9) sequence for Chr 2; b. a first OCR on Chr 2 which comprises SEQ ID NO: 1 or a nucleotide sequence that is at least 90%, 95%, 98%, or 99% identical to SEQ ID NO:l; c. a second OCR on Chromosome 5 (Chr 5) and located between nucleotide positions corresponding to 53853682 and 53854987 of the hgl9 sequence for Chr 5; d. a second OCR on Chr 5 which comprises SEQ ID NO:2 or a nucleotide sequence that is at least 90%, 95%, 98%, or 99% identical to SEQ ID NO:2; e. a third OCR on Chromosome 12 (Chr 12) and located between nucleotide positions corresponding to 122186354 and 122187572 in the hgl9 sequence for Chr 12; f. a third OCR on Chr 12 which comprises SEQ ID NO:3 or a nucleotide sequence that is at least 90%, 95%, 98%, or 99% identical to SEQ ID NO:3; g. a fourth OCR on Chromosome 8 (Chr 8) and located between nucleotide positions corresponding to 30,105,939 and 30,105,944 in the human hg38 reference genome sequence for Chr 8; and h. a fourth OCR on Chr 12 which comprises SEQ ID NO:26 or a nucleotide sequence that is at least 90%, 95%, 98%, or 99% identical to SEQ ID NO:26.
2. The genetically modified cell of embodiment 1, wherein the exogenous transcription unit is inserted into any two of the first, second and third OCRs.
3. The genetically modified cell of embodiment 1, wherein the exogenous transcription unit is inserted into each of the first, second and third OCRs.
4. The genetically modified cell of any one of embodiments 1 to 3, wherein the exogenous transcription unit in the first OCR is inserted at a site located between two nucleotide positions corresponding to positions xi and yi in SEQ ID NO: 1, wherein: a. xi and yi are 10 and 1200; b. xi and yi are 25 and 900; c. xi and yi are 50 and 600; d. xi and yi are 100 and 300; or e. xi and yi are 200 and 250.
5. The genetically modified cell of any one of embodiments 1 to 4, wherein the exogenous transcription unit in the first OCR is inserted at a site located between two nucleotide positions corresponding to: a. positions 211 and 218 in SEQ ID NO:l or b. positions 100,817,368 and 100,817,374 in the hgl9 sequence for Chr 2.
6. The genetically modified cell of any one of embodiments 1 to 5, wherein the transcription unit in the second OCR is inserted at a site located between two nucleotide positions corresponding to positions X2 and yi in SEQ ID NO:2, wherein: a. X2 and yi are 10 and 1100; b. X2 and yi are 20 and 800; c. X2 and yi are 30 and 500; d. X2 and yi are 40 and 200; or e. X2 and yi are 50 and 100.
7. The genetically modified cell of embodiment 6, wherein the transcription unit in the second OCR is inserted at a site located between two nucleotide positions corresponding to: a. positions 59 and 60 in SEQ ID NO:2 or b. positions 53,853,740 and 53,853,741 in the hgl9 sequence for Chr 5.
8. The genetically modified cell of any one of embodiments 1 to 7, wherein the transcription unit in the third OCR is inserted at a site located between two positions corresponding to positions X3 and y3 in SEQ ID NO:3, wherein: a. X3 and y3 are 50 and 1200; b. X3 and y3 are 100 and 1000; c. X3 and y3 are 200 and 800; d. X3 and y3 are 400 and 600; or e. X3 and y3 are 500 and 550. 9. The genetically modified cell of embodiment 8, wherein the transcription unit in the third OCR is inserted at a site located between two nucleotide positions corresponding to: a. positions 518 and 525 in SEQ ID NO: 3 or b. positions 122,186,872 and 122,186,877 in the hgl9 sequence for Chr 12.
10. The genetically modified cell of any one of embodiments 1 to 9, wherein the transcription unit in the fourth OCR is inserted at a site located between two positions corresponding to positions X4 and y4 in SEQ ID NO:26, wherein: a. X4 and y4 are 50 and 950; b. X4 and y4 are 150 and 850; c. X4 and y4 are 300 and 700; d. X4 and y4 are 400 and 600; or e. X4 and y4 are 425 and 475.
11. The genetically modified cell of embodiment 10, wherein the transcription unit in the fourth OCR is inserted at a site located between two nucleotide positions corresponding to: a. positions 440 and 445 in SEQ ID NO:26 or b. positions 30,105,939 and 30,105,944 in the human hg38 reference genome sequence for Chr 8.
12. The genetically modified cell of any one of embodiments 1 to 11, which is derived from a human immortalized cell.
13. The genetically modified cell of any one of embodiments 1 to 12, which is derived from a human retinal epithelial cell line.
14. The genetically modified epithelial cell of embodiment 13, wherein the human retinal epithelial cell line is the ARPE-19 cell line.
15. The genetically modified cell of any one of embodiments 1 to 14, wherein the exogenous transcription unit comprises a promoter sequence operably linked to a coding sequence for a polypeptide.
16. The genetically modified cell of embodiment 15, wherein the promoter sequence consists essentially of or consists of SEQ ID NO:4 or SEQ ID NO:5. 17. The genetically modified cell of embodiment 15 or 16, wherein the coding sequence is operably linked to a polyA signal sequence which consists essentially of, or consists of, SEQ ID NO:6.
18. The genetically modified cell of any one of embodiments 15 to 17, wherein the exogenous transcription unit comprises, consists of, or consists essentially of SEQ ID NO:7 and the coding sequence is inserted between nucleotides 2099 and 2100 of SEQ ID NO:7.
19. The genetically modified cell of any one of embodiments 15 to 18, which is derived from a human RPE cell and the coding sequence is codon-optimized for expression in the genetically modified cell.
20. The genetically modified cell of any one of embodiments 15 to 19, wherein the coding sequence is for a polypeptide selected from the group consisting of: an FVII protein, an FVIII protein, a FIX protein, and a GLA protein.
21. The genetically modified cell of embodiment 20, which is derived from the ARPE-19 cell line and the coding sequence is for a FVIII-BDD protein which comprises an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NO:8, SEQ ID NO: 10, SEQ ID NO: 12, SEQ ID NO : 13 , SEQ ID NO : 14 and SEQ ID NO : 15.
22. The genetically modified cell of embodiment 21, wherein the amino acid sequence is SEQ ID NO:8 and the coding sequence is SEQ ID NO:9.
23. The genetically modified cell of embodiment 21, wherein the amino acid sequence is SEQ ID NO: 10 and the coding sequence is SEQ ID NO: 11.
24. The genetically modified cell of embodiment 20, which is derived from the ARPE-19 cell line and the coding sequence is for a Factor IX protein which comprises the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO: 16.
25. The genetically modified cell of embodiment 24, wherein the coding sequence is SEQ ID NO:17.
26. The genetically modified cell of embodiment 20, which is derived from the ARPE-19 cell line and the coding sequence is for a Factor VII protein which comprises SEQ ID NO: 18 and the coding sequence is SEQ ID NO: 19 or SEQ ID NO:20. 27. The genetically modified cell of embodiment 20, which is derived from the ARPE-19 cell line and the coding sequence is for a GLA protein which comprises an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NO:21, SEQ ID NO:24 and SEQ ID NO:25.
28. The genetically modified cell of embodiment 26, wherein the amino acid sequence is SEQ ID NO:21 and the coding sequence is SEQ ID NO:22 or SEQ ID NO:23.
29. A composition comprising a plurality of genetically modified cells, wherein each cell in the plurality is a genetically modified cell as defined by any one of embodiments 1 to 28.
30. The composition of embodiment 29, wherein the plurality of cells is obtained by culturing a monoclonal cell line.
31. The composition of embodiment 29 or 30, wherein the cells are suspended in a storage medium.
32. A device comprising the composition of any one of embodiments 29 to 31.
33. An implantable device which comprises at least one cell-containing compartment comprising a genetically modified cell or a plurality of the genetically modified cell and at least one means for mitigating the foreign body response (FBR) when the device is implanted into the subject, wherein the genetically modified cell or each cell in the plurality is a genetically modified cell as defined by any one of embodiments 1 to 28.
34. The device of embodiment 33, wherein the at least one cell-containing compartment comprises a polymer composition which encapsulates the plurality of engineered RPE cells, and optionally comprises at least one cell-binding substance (CBS).
35. The device of embodiment 33 or 34, wherein the cell-containing compartment comprises an alginate hydrogel and is surrounded by a barrier compartment, which comprises an alginate hydrogel and optionally comprises a compound of Formula (I), e.g., Compound 101, disposed on the outer surface of the barrier compartment.
36. The device of embodiment 35, wherein the barrier compartment comprises an alginate chemically modified with Compound 101. 37. The device of any one of embodiments 34 to 36, wherein the polymer composition comprises an alginate covalently modified with a peptide, wherein the peptide consists essentially of or consists of GRGDSP, GGRGDSP or GGGRGDSP.
38. The device of any one of embodiments 32 to 37, which is a hydrogel capsule of about 0.75 mm to about 2 mm in diameter, wherein the hydrogel capsule comprises an inner compartment surrounded by an outer compartment, wherein the genetically modified cells are contained in the inner compartment and the outer compartment is substantially free of the cells.
39. A preparation of devices, wherein each device in the preparation is a device as defined in any one of embodiments 32 to 38.
40. A method of treating a subject for hemophilia A, comprising: providing a preparation of devices which contain a plurality of genetically modified cells expressing a Factor VIII protein; and disposing the preparation in the body of the subject; wherein each cell in the plurality is the genetically modified cell of any one of embodiments 21 to 23.
41. The method of embodiment 40, wherein the disposing step comprises placing the preparation into the intraperitoneal space.
42. The method of embodiment 40 or 41, wherein the disposing step comprises placing the preparation into the greater sac of the peritoneal cavity.
43. The genetically modified cell of any one of embodiments 1 to 28, which comprises a first transcription unit and a second transcription unit inserted in tandem in one or more of the OCRs, wherein the promoter sequence in the first transcription unit is different than the promoter sequence in the second transcription unit.
44. The genetically modified cell of embodiment 43, wherein the promoter sequences in the first and second transcription units comprise SEQ ID NO:4 and SEQ ID NO:5, respectively, or the promoter sequences in the first and second transcription units comprise SEQ ID NO:5 and SEQ ID NO:4, respectively. EXAMPLES
In order that the disclosure described herein may be more fully understood, the following examples are set forth. The examples described in this application are offered to illustrate the genetically modified cells, compositions and implantable devices and methods provided herein, and are not to be construed in any way as limiting their scope.
Example 1: Generation and Evaluation of Clones Expressing a FVIII-BDD Protein
ARPE-19 cells were engineered to express a FVIII-BDD protein using the PiggyBac transposon system, which is capable of mediating transfer of a transcription unit between a plasmid vector and TTAA chromosomal sites through a “cut and paste” mechanism. ARPE-19 cells were split and seeded at 400,000 cells per 6-well culture plate and then co-transfected with varying amounts of two plasmids: (1) a transposon vector comprising a transcription unit encoding SEQ ID NO:8 inserted between inverted terminal repeat (ITR) elements recognized by a PiggyBac transposase and (2) a helper plasmid that expresses a piggyBac transposase enzyme and a fluorescent reporter protein (FRP). The transcription unit consisted of the FVIII-BDD coding sequence (SEQ ID NO:9) inserted between nucleotides 2099 and 2100 of SEQ ID NO:7.
At 24 hours post transfection, the cells were sorted via fluorescence activated cell sorting (FACS) and FRP-expressing cells were collected into three pools: one pool for each of three different transfection conditions. Selected clones from each pool were cultured in 6-well plates until they reached 75% confluency (2-3 days), the culture media was replaced with fresh media, cell supernatants were collected 24 hours later and assayed for FVIII protein concentration using ELISA. The number of genomic copies of the exogenous FVIII-BDD transcription unit was estimated using digital droplet PCR (ddPCR).
The pool with the highest FVIII-BDD supernatant levels was selected for clone isolation and screening for FVIII-BDD expression and genomic copy number. A total of 1030 clones were screened: 66 of these clones were identified as being genetically modified with 1 to 8 copies of the FVIII-BDD transcription unit, with the majority of clones having 1 copy. Most of the 66 genetically modified clones failed to divide to sufficient numbers necessary for cell banking. ELISA measurement of FVIII-BDD expression was performed on culture supernatants of the 16 clones that expanded out of wells in a 96-well plate and varying amounts of FVIII-BDD levels were observed (data not shown). Six of the 16 clones failed to expand for final banking. FVIII- BDD expression analysis was repeated on test thaws of clones that expanded to a final bank to ensure that FVIII-BDD expression remained constant. Table 4 below shows the growth characteristics and FVIII-BDD production by eight of the higher expressing clones measured at two time points seven days apart.
Table 4: Characteristics of certain FVIII-BDD expressing clonal cell lines.
Figure imgf000075_0001
Clone No. 1 had the highest and most consistent FVIII-BDD production, with good growth characteristics. The genome of this clone was analyzed to determine the number and location of inserted transcription units, with the results showing insertion of a single transcription unit at each of three sites, which correspond to positions 100,817,368 and 100,817,374 in the hgl9 sequence for Chr 2; positions 53,853,740 and 53,853,741 in the hgl9 sequence for Chr 5; positions 122,186,872 and 122,186,877 in the hgl9 sequence for Chr 12. A second analysis was performed on this clone, which confirmed the insertions sites on chromosome 2, 5 and 12, and identified a fourth insertion site on chromosome 8, which corresponds to positions 30,105,939 and 30,105,944 in the hg38 sequence for Chr 8.
Example 2: Culturing of Exemplary Genetically-Modified ARPE-19 Cells for Encapsulation
Genetically modified ARPE-19 cells comprising a stably integrated exogenous transcription unit as described herein may be cultured to produce a composition of cells suitable for encapsulation in two compartment hydrogel capsules. Cells are grown in complete growth medium (DMEM:F12 with 10% FBS) in 150 cm2 cell culture flasks or CellSTACK® Culture Chambers (Coming Inc., Coming, NY). To passage cells, the medium in the culture flask are aspirated, and the cell layer is briefly rinsed with phosphate buffered saline (pH 7.4, 137 mMNaCl, 2.7 mM KC1, 8 mM Na2HP04, and 2 mM KH2P04, Gibco). 5-10 mL of 0.05% (w/v) trypsin/ 0.53 mM EDTA solution (“TrypsinEDTA”) is added to the flask, and the cells are observed under an inverted microscope until the cell layer is dispersed, usually between 3-5 minutes. To avoid clumping, cells are handled with care and hitting or shaking the flask during the dispersion period is minimized. If the cells do not detach, the flasks are placed at 37°C to facilitate dispersal. Once the cells disperse, 10 mL complete growth medium is added and the cells are aspirated by gentle pipetting. The cell suspension is transferred to a centrifuge tube and spun down at approximately 125 x g for 5-10 minutes to remove TrypsinEDTA. The supernatant is discarded, and the cells are resuspended in fresh growth medium. Appropriate aliquots of cell suspension are added to new culture vessels, which are incubated at 37 °C. The medium is renewed weekly.
Example 3: Preparation of exemplary modified polymers
Chemically-modified Polymer A polymeric material may be chemically modified with a compound of Formula (I) (or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof) prior to formation of a device described herein (e.g., a hydrogel capsule). For example, in the case of alginate, the alginate carboxylic acid is activated for coupling to one or more amine-functionalized compounds to achieve an alginate modified with an afibrotic compound, e.g., a compound of Formula (I). The alginate polymer is dissolved in water (30 mL/gram polymer) and treated with 2-chloro-4,6- dimethoxy-l,3,5-triazine (0.5 eq) and N-methylmorpholine (1 eq). To this mixture is added a solution of the compound of interest (e.g., Compound 101 shown in Table 3) in acetonitrile (0.3M).
The amounts of the compound and coupling reagent added depends on the desired concentration of the compound bound to the alginate, e.g., conjugation density. A medium conjugation density of Compound 101 typically ranges from 2% to 5% N, while a high conjugation density of Compound 101 typically ranges from 5.1% to 8% N. To prepare a solution of low molecular weight alginate, chemically modified with a medium conjugation density of Compound 101 (CM-LMW-Alg-101-Medium polymer), the dissolved unmodified low molecular weight alginate (approximate MW < 75 kDa, G:M ratio > 1.5) is treated with 2-chloro-4,6-dimethoxy- 1,3,5-triazine (5.1 mmol/g alginate) and N-methylmorpholine (10.2 mmol/ g alginate) and Compound 101 (5.4 mmol/ g alginate). To prepare a solution of low molecular weight alginate, chemically modified with a high conjugation density of Compound 101 (CM-LMW-Alg-101-High polymer), the dissolved unmodified low-molecular weight alginate (approximate MW < 75 kDa, G:M ratio > 1.5) is treated with 2-chloro-4,6-dimethoxy-l,3,5-triazine (5.1 mmol/g alginate) and N-methylmorpholine (10.2 mmol/ g alginate) and Compound 101 (10.5 mmol/ g alginate). The reaction is warmed to 55°C for 16h, then cooled to room temperature and gently concentrated via rotary evaporation, then the residue is dissolved in water. The mixture is filtered through a bed of cyano-modified silica gel (Silicycle) and the filter cake is washed with water. The resulting solution is then extensively dialyzed (10,000 MWCO membrane) and the alginate solution is concentrated via lyophilization to provide the desired chemically-modified alginate as a solid or is concentrated using any technique suitable to produce a chemically modified alginate solution with a viscosity of 25 cP to 35 cP.
The conjugation density of a chemically modified alginate is measured by combustion analysis for percent nitrogen. The sample is prepared by dialyzing a solution of the chemically modified alginate against water (10,000 MWCO membrane) for 24 hours, replacing the water twice followed by lyophilization to a constant weight.
CBP -Alginates. A polymeric material may be covalently modified with a cell-binding peptide prior to formation of a device described herein (e.g., a hydrogel capsule described herein) using methods known in the art, see, e.g., Jeon O, et ah, Tissue Eng Part A. 16:2915-2925 (2010) and Rowley, J.A. et ah, Biomaterials 20:45-53 (1999).
For example, in the case of alginate, an alginate solution (1%, w/v) is prepared with 50mM of 2-(N-morpholino)-ethanesulfonic acid hydrate buffer solution containing 0.5M NaCl at pH 6.5, and sequentially mixed with N-hydroxysuccinimide and 1 -ethyl-3 -[3 -(dimethylamino)propyl] carbodiimide (EDC). The molar ratio of N-hydroxysuccinimide to EDC is 0.5:1.0. The peptide of interest is added to the alginate solution. The amounts of peptide and coupling reagent added depends on the desired concentration of the peptide bound to the alginate, e.g., peptide conjugation density. By increasing the amount of peptide and coupling reagent, higher conjugation density can be obtained. After reacting for 24 h, the reaction is purified by dialysis against ultrapure deionized water (diH20) (MWCO 3500) for 3 days, treated with activated charcoal for 30 min, filtered (0.22 mm filter), and concentrated to the desired viscosity.
The conjugation density of a peptide-modified alginate is measured by combustion analysis for percent nitrogen. The sample is prepared by dialyzing a solution of the chemically modified alginate against water (10,000 MWCO membrane) for 24 hours, replacing the water twice followed by lyophilization to a constant weight.
Example 4: Preparation of exemplary alginate solutions for making hydrogel capsules 70:30 mixture of chemically-modified and unmodified alginate. A low molecular weight alginate (PRONOVA™ VLVG alginate, NovaMatrix, Sandvika, Norway, cat. #4200506, approximate molecular weight < 75 kDa; G:M ratio > 1 .5) is chemically modified with Compound 101 to produce chemically modified low molecular weight alginate (CM-LMW-Alg-101) solution with a viscosity of 25 cp to 35 cP and a conjugation density of 5.1% to 8% N, as determined by combustion analysis for percent nitrogen. A solution of high molecular weight unmodified alginate (U-HMW-Alg) is prepared by dissolving unmodified alginate (PRONOVA™ SLG100, NovaMatrix, Sandvika, Norway, cat. #4202106, approximate molecular weight of 150 kDa - 250 kDa) at 3% weight to volume in 0.9% saline. The CM-LMW-Alg solution is blended with the U- HMW-Alg solution at a volume ratio of 70% CM-LMW-Alg to 30% U-HMW-Alg (referred to herein as a 70:30 CM-Alg:UM-Alg solution).
Unmodified alginate solution. An unmodified medium molecular weight alginate (SLG20, NovaMatrix, Sandvika, Norway, cat. #4202006, approximate molecular weight of 75-150 kDa), is dissolved at 1.4% weight to volume in 0.9% saline to prepare a U-MMW-Alg solution.
Unmodified alginate solution. An unmodified medium molecular weight alginate (SLG20, NovaMatrix, Sandvika, Norway, cat. #4202006, approximate molecular weight of 75-150 kDa), is dissolved at 1.4% weight to volume in 0.9% saline to prepare a U-MMW-Alg solution.
Alsinate Solution Comprising Cell Binding Sites. A solution of SLG20 alginate is modified with a peptide consisting of GRGDSP as described above and concentrated to a viscosity of about lOOcP. The amount of the peptide and coupling reagent used are selected to achieve a target peptide conjugation density of about 0.2 to 0.3, as measured by combustion analysis.
Example 5: Formation of exemplary two-compartment hydrogel capsules
Suspensions of genetically modified cells as single cells are encapsulated in two- compartment hydrogel capsules according to the protocols described below.
Immediately before encapsulation, a desired volume of a composition comprising the cells (e.g., from a culture of the cells as described in Example 1) are centrifuged at 1,400 r.p.m. for 1 min and washed with calcium-free Krebs-Henseleit (KH) Buffer (4.7 mM KC1, 25 mM HEPES, 1.2 mM KH2PO4, 1.2 mM MgS04 x 7H20, 135 mM NaCl, pH ~ 7.4, -290 mOsm). After washing, the cells ae centrifuged again and all of the supernatant is aspirated. The cell pellet is resuspended in the GRGDSP -modified alginate solution described in Example 3 at a desired cell density (e.g., about 50 to 150 million suspended single cells per ml alginate solution). Prior to fabricating hydrogel capsules, buffers and alginate solutions are sterilized by filtration through a 0.2-mih filter using aseptic processes.
To prepare two-compartment hydrogel millicapsules of about 1.5 mm diameter, an electrostatic droplet generator is set up as follows: an ES series 0-100-kV, 20-watt high-voltage power generator (EQ series, Matsusada, NC, EISA) is connected to the top and bottom of a coaxial needle (inner lumen of 22G, outer lumen of 18G, Rame-Hart Instrument Co., Succasunna, NJ, USA). The inner lumen is attached to a first 5-ml Luer-lock syringe (BD, NJ, USA), which is connected to a syringe pump (Pump 11 Pico Plus, Harvard Apparatus, Holliston, MA, USA) that is oriented vertically. The outer lumen is connected via a luer coupling to a second 5-ml Luer-lock syringe which is connected to a second syringe pump (Pump 11 Pico Plus) that is oriented horizontally. A first alginate solution containing the genetically modified cells (as single cells) suspended in a GRGDSP-modified alginate solution is placed in the first syringe and a cell-free alginate solution comprising a mixture of a chemically-modified alginate and unmodified alginate is placed in the second syringe. The two syringe pumps move the first and second alginate solutions from the syringes through both lumens of the coaxial needle and single droplets containing both alginate solutions are extruded from the needle into a glass dish containing a cross-linking solution. The settings of each Pico Plus syringe pump are 12.06 mm diameter and the flow rates of each pump are adjusted to achieve a flow rate ratio of 1 : 1 for the two alginate solutions. Thus, with the total flow rate set at lOml/h, the flow rate for each alginate solution was about 5 mL/h. Control (empty) capsules are prepared in the same manner except that the alginate solution used for the inner compartment is a cell-free solution.
After extrusion of the desired volumes of alginate solutions, the alginate droplets are crosslinked for five minutes in a cross-linking solution which contained 25mM HEPES buffer, 20 mM BaCh, 0.2M mannitol and 0.01% of poloxamer 188. Capsules that fall to the bottom of the crosslinking vessel are collected by pipetting into a conical tube. After the capsules settle in the tube, the crosslinking buffer is removed, and capsules are washed four times in HEPES buffer, two times in 0.9% saline, and two times in culture media and stored in an incubator at 37°C.
EQUIVALENTS AND SCOPE
This application refers to various issued patents, published patent applications, journal articles, and other publications, all of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety. If there is a conflict between any of the incorporated references and the instant specification, the specification shall control. In addition, any particular embodiment of the present disclosure that falls within the prior art may be explicitly excluded from any one or more of the claims.
Because such embodiments are deemed to be known to one of ordinary skill in the art, they may be excluded even if the exclusion is not set forth explicitly herein. Any particular embodiment of the disclosure can be excluded from any claim, for any reason, whether or not related to the existence of prior art.
Those skilled in the art will recognize or be able to ascertain using no more than routine experimentation many equivalents to the specific embodiments described herein. The scope of the present embodiments described herein is not intended to be limited to the above Description, Figures, or Examples but rather is as set forth in the appended claims. Those of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that various changes and modifications to this description may be made without departing from the spirit or scope of the present disclosure, as defined in the following claims.

Claims

1. A genetically modified cell comprising at least one exogenous transcription unit inserted into at least one genomic open chromatin region (OCR), wherein the cell is derived from a human cell and the OCR is selected from the group consisting of: a. a first OCR on Chromosome 2 (Chr 2) and located between nucleotide positions corresponding to positions 100817157 and 100818556 in the human hgl9 reference genome (hgl9) sequence for Chr 2; b. a first OCR on Chr 2 which comprises SEQ ID NO: 1 or a nucleotide sequence that is at least 90%, 95%, 98%, or 99% identical to SEQ ID NO:l; c. a second OCR on Chromosome 5 (Chr 5) and located between nucleotide positions corresponding to 53853682 and 53854987 of the hgl9 sequence for Chr 5; d. a second OCR on Chr 5 which comprises SEQ ID NO:2 or a nucleotide sequence that is at least 90%, 95%, 98%, or 99% identical to SEQ ID NO:2; e. a third OCR on Chromosome 12 (Chr 12) and located between nucleotide positions corresponding to 122186354 and 122187572 in the hgl9 sequence for Chr 12; f. a third OCR on Chr 12 which comprises SEQ ID NO:3 or a nucleotide sequence that is at least 90%, 95%, 98%, or 99% identical to SEQ ID NO:3; g. a fourth OCR on Chromosome 8 (Chr 8) and located between nucleotide positions corresponding to 30,105,939 and 30,105,944 in the human hg38 reference genome sequence for Chr 8; and h. a fourth OCR on Chr 12 which comprises SEQ ID NO:26 or a nucleotide sequence that is at least 90%, 95%, 98%, or 99% identical to SEQ ID NO:26.
2. The genetically modified cell of claim 1, wherein the exogenous transcription unit is inserted into any two of the first, second and third OCRs or into any two of the first, second, third and fourth OCRs.
3. The genetically modified cell of claim 1, wherein the exogenous transcription unit is inserted into each of the first, second and third OCRs or into each of the first, second, third and fourth OCRs.
4. The genetically modified cell of claim 1, wherein the exogenous transcription unit in the first OCR is inserted at a site located between two nucleotide positions corresponding to positions xi and yi in SEQ ID NO: 1, wherein: a. xi and yi are 10 and 1200; b. xi and yi are 25 and 900; c. xi and yi are 50 and 600; d. xi and yi are 100 and 300; or e. xi and yi are 200 and 250.
5. The genetically modified cell of claim 1, wherein the exogenous transcription unit in the first OCR is inserted at a site located between two nucleotide positions corresponding to: a. positions 211 and 218 in SEQ ID NO:l or b. positions 100,817,368 and 100,817,374 in the hgl9 sequence for Chr 2.
6. The genetically modified cell of claim 1, wherein the transcription unit in the second OCR is inserted at a site located between two nucleotide positions corresponding to positions X2 and y2 in SEQ ID NO:2, wherein: a. X2 and yi are 10 and 1100; b. X2 and yi are 20 and 800; c. X2 and yi are 30 and 500; d. X2 and yi are 40 and 200; or e. X2 and yi are 50 and 100.
7. The genetically modified cell of claim 6, wherein the transcription unit in the second OCR is inserted at a site located between two nucleotide positions corresponding to: a. positions 59 and 60 in SEQ ID NO:2 or b. positions 53,853,740 and 53,853,741 in the hgl9 sequence for Chr 5.
8. The genetically modified cell of claim 1, wherein the transcription unit in the third OCR is inserted at a site located between two positions corresponding to positions X3 and y3 in SEQ ID NO:3, wherein: a. X3 and y3 are 50 and 1200; b. X3 and y3 are 100 and 1000; c. X3 and y3 are 200 and 800; d. X3 and y3 are 400 and 600; or e. X3 and y3 are 500 and 550.
9. The genetically modified cell of claim 8, wherein the transcription unit in the third OCR is inserted at a site located between two nucleotide positions corresponding to: a. positions 518 and 525 in SEQ ID NO: 3 or b. positions 122,186,872 and 122,186,877 in the hgl9 sequence for Chr 12.
10. The genetically modified cell of claim 1, wherein the transcription unit in the fourth OCR is inserted at a site located between two positions corresponding to positions X4 and y4 in SEQ ID NO:26, wherein: a. X4 and y4 are 50 and 950; b. X4 and y4 are 150 and 850; c. X4 and y4 are 300 and 700; d. X4 and y4 are 400 and 600; or e. X4 and y4 are 425 and 475.
11. The genetically modified cell of claim 10, wherein the transcription unit in the fourth OCR is inserted at a site located between two nucleotide positions corresponding to: a. positions 440 and 445 in SEQ ID NO:26 or b. positions 30,105,939 and 30,105,944 in the human hg38 reference genome sequence for Chr 8.
12. The genetically modified cell of claim 1, which is derived from an immortalized cell.
13. The genetically modified cell of claim 1, which is derived from a retinal epithelial cell line.
14. The genetically modified cell of claim 13, wherein the retinal epithelial cell line is the ARPE- 19 cell line.
15. The genetically modified cell of claim 1, wherein the exogenous transcription unit comprises a promoter sequence operably linked to a coding sequence for a polypeptide.
16. The genetically modified cell of claim 15, wherein the polypeptide is selected from the group consisting of: an FVII protein, an FVIII protein, a FIX protein, and a GLA protein.
17. The genetically modified cell of claim 16, wherein the cell is derived from the ARPE-19 cell line and the coding sequence is for a FVIII-BDD protein which comprises SEQ ID NO:8.
18. The genetically modified cell of claim 17, wherein the coding sequence is SEQ ID NO:9.
19. A composition comprising a plurality of genetically modified epithelial cells, wherein each cell in the plurality is a genetically modified cell as according to claim 1.
20. The composition of claim 19, wherein the plurality of cells is obtained by culturing a monoclonal cell line.
21. The composition of claim 19, wherein the cells are suspended in a storage medium.
22. A device comprising the composition of claim 19.
23. An implantable device which comprises at least one cell-containing compartment comprising a plurality of genetically modified cells and at least one means for mitigating the foreign body response (FBR) when the device is implanted into the subject, wherein each cell in the plurality is a genetically modified cell according to claim 1.
24. A preparation of devices, wherein each device in the preparation is a device according to claim 22.
25. A method of treating a subject for hemophilia A, comprising: providing a preparation of devices which contain a plurality of genetically modified cells expressing a Factor VIII protein, wherein each cell in the plurality is the genetically modified cell of claim 17; and disposing the preparation in the body of the subject.
PCT/US2020/061524 2019-11-22 2020-11-20 Monoclonal cell lines expressing an exogenous substance and uses thereof WO2021102271A1 (en)

Priority Applications (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US17/778,159 US20230038379A1 (en) 2019-11-22 2020-11-20 Monoclonal cell lines expressing an exogenous substance and uses thereof
CA3161672A CA3161672A1 (en) 2019-11-22 2020-11-20 Monoclonal cell lines expressing an exogenous substance and uses thereof
EP20891108.1A EP4061942A4 (en) 2019-11-22 2020-11-20 Monoclonal cell lines expressing an exogenous substance and uses thereof

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US201962938995P 2019-11-22 2019-11-22
US62/938,995 2019-11-22
US202063004212P 2020-04-02 2020-04-02
US63/004,212 2020-04-02

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2021102271A1 true WO2021102271A1 (en) 2021-05-27

Family

ID=75981692

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2020/061524 WO2021102271A1 (en) 2019-11-22 2020-11-20 Monoclonal cell lines expressing an exogenous substance and uses thereof

Country Status (4)

Country Link
US (1) US20230038379A1 (en)
EP (1) EP4061942A4 (en)
CA (1) CA3161672A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2021102271A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2023125963A1 (en) * 2021-12-31 2023-07-06 Skyline Therapeutics (Shanghai) Co., Ltd. Recombinant aav for the gene therapy of fabry disease

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CA3077380A1 (en) * 2017-09-27 2019-04-04 Sigilon Therapeutics, Inc. Methods, compositions, and implantable elements comprising active cells

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20060166874A1 (en) * 2002-09-30 2006-07-27 Haaning Jesper M Fvii or fviia variants having increased clotting activity
US20120141573A1 (en) * 2010-12-02 2012-06-07 Vincent Ling Cell Lines That Secrete Anti-Angiogenic Antibody-Scaffolds and Soluble Receptors and Uses Thereof
US20130195806A1 (en) * 2011-11-14 2013-08-01 Advanced Cell Technology, Inc. Pharmaceutical preparations of human rpe cells and uses thereof
US20180119138A1 (en) * 2015-05-08 2018-05-03 The Broad Institute Inc. Functional genomics using crispr-cas systems for saturating mutagenesis of non-coding elements, compositions, methods, libraries and applications thereof
WO2018204764A1 (en) * 2017-05-05 2018-11-08 Camp4 Therapeutics Corporation Identification and targeted modulation of gene signaling networks

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20060166874A1 (en) * 2002-09-30 2006-07-27 Haaning Jesper M Fvii or fviia variants having increased clotting activity
US20120141573A1 (en) * 2010-12-02 2012-06-07 Vincent Ling Cell Lines That Secrete Anti-Angiogenic Antibody-Scaffolds and Soluble Receptors and Uses Thereof
US20130195806A1 (en) * 2011-11-14 2013-08-01 Advanced Cell Technology, Inc. Pharmaceutical preparations of human rpe cells and uses thereof
US20180119138A1 (en) * 2015-05-08 2018-05-03 The Broad Institute Inc. Functional genomics using crispr-cas systems for saturating mutagenesis of non-coding elements, compositions, methods, libraries and applications thereof
WO2018204764A1 (en) * 2017-05-05 2018-11-08 Camp4 Therapeutics Corporation Identification and targeted modulation of gene signaling networks

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
DATABASE NUCLEOTIDE NCBI; 18 April 2019 (2019-04-18), "Eukaryotic synthetic construct chromosome 2", XP055830394, Database accession no. CP034498.1 *
See also references of EP4061942A4 *

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2023125963A1 (en) * 2021-12-31 2023-07-06 Skyline Therapeutics (Shanghai) Co., Ltd. Recombinant aav for the gene therapy of fabry disease

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP4061942A1 (en) 2022-09-28
CA3161672A1 (en) 2021-05-27
US20230038379A1 (en) 2023-02-09
EP4061942A4 (en) 2023-12-20

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20230287341A1 (en) Genetically modified cell lines expressing an exogenous substance and uses thereof
US20200263196A1 (en) Methods, compositions, and implantable elements comprising active cells
US20210145759A1 (en) Implantable particles and related methods
AU2019351262A1 (en) Implantable devices for cell therapy and related methods
US20230038379A1 (en) Monoclonal cell lines expressing an exogenous substance and uses thereof
US20210002433A1 (en) Biocompatible hydrogel capsules and process for preparing same
US20210145889A1 (en) Methods, compositions, and implantable elements comprising stem cells
US20230045277A1 (en) Compounds, polymers, devices, and uses thereof
US20240209336A1 (en) Genetically modified human cell lines and uses thereof
WO2023076620A1 (en) Compositions for cell-based therapies and related methods
WO2024081309A1 (en) Engineered cells and implantable elements for treatment of disease
WO2024081310A1 (en) Engineered cells and implantable elements for treatment of disease
WO2024006551A2 (en) Covalently crosslinked polysaccharides and methods of use thereof
WO2024006544A2 (en) Covalently crosslinked polysaccharides and methods of use thereof
WO2022164928A2 (en) Compositions, devices and methods for treating immune-mediated inflammatory diseases
JP2024504414A (en) Compositions, devices and methods for inducing antigen-specific immune tolerance

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20891108

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 3161672

Country of ref document: CA

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2020891108

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20220622